Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual PDF

1 of 222
1 of 222

Summary of Content for Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual PDF

Instruction manual

Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

2011 Brstner GmbH Kehl

Instruction manualDear Reader ... We would like to congratulate you on the purchase of your new caravan. You have selected a top-quality vehicle which will afford you many years of enjoyment. To enable you to always use and operate your caravan properly and easily, your Brstner dealer will first pro- vide you detailed instructions for all important functions when you take delivery. This manual, as well as the instruction manuals from the appliance manufacturers are your constant travelling companions and will help answer any questions you may have regarding your caravan.

Before your first journey Please familiarise yourself with this manual rather than relying on it strictly for reference. Fill in the warranty cards for the appliances and special equipment in the individual instructions and send these cards to the respective manufacturers. This ensures your warranty claim for each appliance.

Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Instruction manual

3Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Contents

1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.2 Environmental tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.1.3 In case of fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.3 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2.5 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2.7 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

3 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.2 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.3 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.4 Caravan couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.4.1 AKS 1300 stabiliser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 3.4.2 AKS 3004 stabiliser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.4.3 WS 3000 D stabiliser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.5 Caravan control system . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.5.1 Caravan control system (ATC)

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.5.2 Caravan control system (IDC)

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3.6 Detaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.7 Manoeuvring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 3.8 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 3.8.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 3.8.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.8.3 Loading the caravan correctly . . . . . . . 28 3.8.4 Caravan load, nose weight

and axle load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.8.5 Bike rack (special equipment) . . . . . . . 30 3.9 External mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.10 Television (special equipment) . . . . . . 32 3.11 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 35 4.1 Driving with the caravan . . . . . . . . . . . 35 4.2 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 4.3 Driving in reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

5 Pitching the caravan . . . . . . . . . 37 5.1 Handbrake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.2 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.3 Corner steadies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 5.4 Entrance step (free-standing) . . . . . . . 38 5.5 Waste water tank, mobile

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.6 230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

5.7 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 5.8 Satellite unit (special equipment) . . . . . 39 5.8.1 Equipment with automatic

antenna alignment (Alden). . . . . . . . . . 39 5.8.2 Equipment with semi-automatic

antenna alignment (Alden). . . . . . . . . . 40 5.8.3 Equipment with automatic

antenna alignment (Oyster) . . . . . . . . . 41

6 Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 6.1 Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 6.1.1 Conversion door, outside. . . . . . . . . . . 43 6.1.2 Conversion door, inside . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 6.1.3 Window conversion door (Seitz)

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 6.1.4 Folding insect screen on the

conversion door (special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

6.2 External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 6.2.1 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped. . . . . . . . . . 46 6.2.2 Flap lock, rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 6.2.3 Flap for toilet cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 6.2.4 Flap for the 230 V connection,

square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 6.2.5 Cap for the drinking water filler neck

(only for water tank 40 l) . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6.3 Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 6.3.1 Furniture flaps with push button. . . . . . 48 6.3.2 Furniture flaps with handle. . . . . . . . . . 49 6.3.3 Furniture flaps with release handle . . . 49 6.4 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.4.1 Entrance area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.4.2 Living area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.5 Spotlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 6.6 Holder for flat screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.6.1 Holder on the column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.6.2 Holder in the TV cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.7 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.8 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.9 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 6.9.1 Hinged window with rotary hinges . . . . 54 6.9.2 Hinged window with automatic

hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 6.9.3 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 6.9.4 Roman shade and insect screen

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 6.10 Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6.10.1 Heki skylight (mini and midi)

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 59 6.10.2 Heki skylight

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 60 6.11 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 6.11.1 Suspension table with folding leg . . . . 62 6.11.2 Lift-off table, movable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 6.12 Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.12.1 Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.12.2 Fixed bed (manual setup) . . . . . . . . . . 63

Contents

4 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

6.12.3 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . 64 6.12.4 Fixed bed

(adjustable head section). . . . . . . . . . . 64 6.12.5 Widening single beds

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6.13 Converting seating groups

for sleeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.13.1 Bench and central seating group

without additional cushion . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.13.2 Round seating group

with square table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 6.13.3 Round seating group

without additional cushion . . . . . . . . . . 68 6.13.4 Round seating group

with additional cushion (foldable). . . . . 69

7 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 7.2 Gas bottles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 7.3 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 7.4 Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 7.5 External gas connection

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 7.6 DuoControl switching facility

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 7.7 Gas alarm system

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

8 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . . 79 8.2 Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.3 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.4 Power supply unit CSV 400-1 . . . . . . . 80 8.5 Battery main switch

(Belcanto Nordic models). . . . . . . . . . . 81 8.6 Electric kit (special equipment) . . . . . . 81 8.6.1 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 8.6.2 Power supply unit CSV 409 . . . . . . . . . 83 8.6.3 Panel LT 408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 8.6.4 Connection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 8.7 230 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 8.7.1 230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 8.7.2 Connecting 230 V power supply . . . . . 89 8.8 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.8.1 12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 8.8.2 230 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 8.9 Thirteen-pin plug connection

diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 8.10 External socket

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 8.11 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8.11.1 Circuit diagram, interior . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 8.11.2 Circuit diagram, exterior. . . . . . . . . . . . 96

9 Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 9.2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

9.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . .98

9.2.2 To heat properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 9.2.3 Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 9.2.4 Circulation fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 9.2.5 Airmix comfort package

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 9.2.6 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 9.2.7 Ultraheat additional electric heater

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 9.2.8 Warming unit for waste water pipes

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 9.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 9.3 Air conditioning unit

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 9.3.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 9.3.2 Telair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 9.4 Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 9.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the

right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . .110 9.4.2 Hot water source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 9.4.3 Truma boiler (special equipment) . . . .112 9.4.4 Alde boiler

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . .114 9.5 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 9.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 9.5.2 Gas oven (Dometic)

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 9.5.3 Microwave oven

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 9.5.4 Extractor hood

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . .119 9.6 Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 9.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill . . . . . . . . .119 9.6.2 Operation (Dometic 8 series with

manual ignition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 9.6.3 Operation (Dometic 8 series with

manual power selection MES) . . . . . .121 9.6.4 Operation (Dometic 8 series with

automatic power selection AES). . . . .123 9.6.5 Refrigerator door locking

mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

10 Sanitary fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 10.1 Water supply, general. . . . . . . . . . . . .127 10.2 Switch for water pump

(Belcanto Nordic models) . . . . . . . . . .128 10.3 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 10.3.1 Water tank 22 l with external flap

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 10.3.2 Water tank 40 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 10.4 Waste water tank

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 10.5 Filling the water system . . . . . . . . . . .130 10.6 Emptying the water system . . . . . . . .131 10.7 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

5Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Contents

10.8 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 10.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford C-200) . . . . . . 133 10.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat

(Thetford C-402) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

11 Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 11.1 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 11.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 11.1.2 Washing with a high-pressure

cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 11.1.3 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 11.1.4 Windows of acrylic glass . . . . . . . . . . 148 11.1.5 Hot galvanized chassis . . . . . . . . . . . 148 11.1.6 Underbody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 11.1.7 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 11.2 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 11.3 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 11.3.1 Cleaning the water tank . . . . . . . . . . 150 11.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes. . . . . . . . . . 151 11.3.3 Disinfecting the water system . . . . . . 151 11.4 Extractor hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 11.5 Air conditioning unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 11.5.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 11.5.2 Telair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 11.6 Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 11.6.1 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 11.6.2 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 11.6.3 At the end of the winter season. . . . . 154 11.7 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 11.7.1 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 11.7.2 Winter lay-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 11.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a

temporary lay-up or after lay-up over winter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.1 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.2 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.3 Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 12.3.2 AKS 1300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 12.3.3 AKS 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 12.3.4 WS 3000 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 12.4 Manoeuvring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 12.5 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 12.6 Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 12.7 Alde hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 12.7.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 163 12.7.2 Topping up heating fluid . . . . . . . . . . 163 12.7.3 Bleeding the heating system. . . . . . . 163 12.8 Replacing bulbs, external . . . . . . . . . 164 12.8.1 Front lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 12.8.2 Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 12.8.3 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 12.8.4 Types of bulbs for exterior

lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 12.9 Replacing bulbs, internal. . . . . . . . . . 166

12.9.1 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 12.9.2 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 12.9.3 Recessed halogen light (flat) . . . . . . . 168 12.9.4 Recessed light with LED . . . . . . . . . . 168 12.9.5 Halogen spotlight (swivelling) . . . . . . 169 12.10 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 12.11 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . 170 12.12 Warning and information stickers . . . 170

13 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 13.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 13.2 Tyre selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 13.3 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 13.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 13.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 13.5.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 13.5.2 Tightening torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 13.5.3 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 13.5.4 Changing a wheel at alloy

wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 13.6 Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 13.6.1 Spare wheel support in gas

bottle compartment (partially special equipment) . . . . . . . 177

13.6.2 Spare wheel support under the vehicle (special equipment) . . . . . 178

13.7 Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

14 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 14.1 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 14.2 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 14.3 Caravan control system . . . . . . . . . . . 184 14.3.1 Caravan control system (ATC) . . . . . 184 14.3.2 Caravan control system (IDC) . . . . . . 185 14.4 Manoeuvring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 14.5 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 14.6 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 14.7 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 14.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 14.7.2 Microwave oven. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 14.8 Heater, boiler

and hot water source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 14.8.1 Trumatic S hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . 188 14.8.2 Alde heater/boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 14.8.3 Truma boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 14.8.4 Truma hot water source. . . . . . . . . . . 190 14.9 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 14.9.1 Dometic 8 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 14.9.2 Dometic 8 series with MES . . . . . . . . 191 14.9.3 Dometic 8 series with AES . . . . . . . . 192 14.10 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 14.10.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 14.10.2 Telair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 14.11 Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 14.12 Body. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Contents

6 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

15 Special equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 197 15.1 Weight details for special

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 16.1 Table of linear measures . . . . . . . . . . 199 16.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries. . . . . 201 17.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . . 201 17.3 Speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 17.4 Driving with low beam in

European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from

camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 17.6 Gas supply in

European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 17.7 Toll regulations in

European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely

during travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 17.9 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . . 208 17.10 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

18 Inspection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

7Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Introduction 1

1IntroductionPlease read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time! Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users of the safety regulations.

This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-spe- cific equipment or special equipment. These sections are specially marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descrip- tions. However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not described in this instruction manual. Special equipment is described when an explanation is required. Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.

Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed invalid. Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. There- fore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the con- tents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included at the time of going to press is described. The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.

The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.

The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to, or inside the vehicle.

This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.

This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.

The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in direction of travel. All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".

The vehicle comes without a wheelbrace and vehicle jack. We suggest you obtain a commercially available wheelbrace before you first use your car- avan, in case of an emergency. If no AL-KO vehicle jack (special equip- ment for AL-KO chassis) is present, obtain a conventional commercial scissor-type jack or an hydraulic vehicle jack, in order to have it ready in the case of mishap or emergency. Our authorised dealers and service cen- tres will be happy to advise you.

8 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Introduction1

1.1 General The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual are not followed. Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instruc- tions in the instruction manual. Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be immediately remedied by qualified personnel. Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an authorised specialist workshop only. Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the manufacturer. Luggage and accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permis- sible gross weight. Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.

1.2 Environmental tips Be considerate of the environment. Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside. On board, collect waste water only in the waste water tank or if necessary in other containers designed for that purpose. Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at dis- posal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially pro- vided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations. Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not com- pletely full (hygiene). If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with fresh water every time it is emptied. Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the level indicator lights up. Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste paper baskets which are situated at car parks. Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of rubbish on board. When parked, do not allow the engine of the towing vehicle to run more than necessary. When running idle, a cold engine releases more contami- nants than usual. The running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the vehicle is in motion. Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can also be biologically degraded and only use small doses.

9Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Introduction 1

When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for parking areas which are specially reserved for caravans and towing vehi- cles. Enquire at the town or community authority about parking spaces. Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.

10 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Introduction1

11Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Safety 2

2SafetyChapter overview This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are for the protection of persons and property. The instructions address the following topics:

fire prevention and what to do in case of fire general care of the vehicle road safety of the vehicle towing gas system of the vehicle electrical system of the vehicle water system of the vehicle

2.1 Fire prevention 2.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks

2.1.2 Fire-fighting

2.1.3 In case of fire

Never leave children in the vehicle unattended. Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances. Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard! Never use portable heating or cooking appliances. Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical system, gas system or appliances.

Always carry a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle. The fire extin- guisher must be approved, tested and close at hand. The fire extinguisher is not included in the scope of delivery. Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qual- ified personnel. Observe the date of testing. Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.

Evacuate all passengers. Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains. Close regulator tap on the gas bottle. Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade. Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.

Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits. Keep escape routes clear. Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.

12 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Safety2

All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered as emergency exits:

Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction Opening angle at least 70 Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm

2.2 General

2.3 Road safety

The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven- tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO2 levels.

Observe the headroom of the doors.

As far as the appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed. Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in the vehicle papers. Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Informa- tion concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and service centres. Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and windows are closed. The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which is valid for the respective vehicle class. When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle and the fitted appliances.

Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indi- cating and lighting equipment and the brakes. If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop. Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely. Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet. During the journey, no persons are to travel inside the caravan.

13Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Safety 2

2.4 Towing

In case of underpasses, tunnels or similar obstacles, note the total height of the vehicle (including the roof load). In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the journey. Before commencing the journey, empty the waste water tank. Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the vehicle (see chapter 3). When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents). Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight on the caravan cou- pling and do not let the weight fall below the minimum nose value. Load the caravan accordingly. While driving with your caravan, the towing vehicle must be equipped with two external mirrors. Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrig- erator door securing device. Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights. Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them. Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract the corner steadies or steady legs, which are fitted to the vehicle. Before commencing the journey, crank the jockey wheel up as far as pos- sible. Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position. During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated. Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over time (see chapter 13).

Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci- dent and injury! No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during positioning for connecting and detaching.

14 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Safety2

2.5 Gas system 2.5.1 General instructions

Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap on the gas bottle. No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author- ised specialist workshop. Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop. The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car- ried out. In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme- diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.). Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight. Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes. If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap. Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time. The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 C, whereas butane gas gasifies at 0 C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter. Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work- shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced. Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside.

15Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Safety 2

2.5.2 Gas bottles

2.6 Electrical system

Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-proof. Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the compartment. The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible. Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage. Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.

Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment. Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment. Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt. If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top. Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu- lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle. Use your hands only to connect the gas pressure regulator or the gas tube to the gas bottles. Do not use any tools. Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements. Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 C. Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve. Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles. Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system. Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the mains. Only use original fuses with the stipulated values.

16 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Safety2

2.7 Water system

Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied. Never bridge or repair fuses.

Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes. In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system before using the vehicle.

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Make sure that the 12 V power supply on the panel is switched off. Otherwise, the water pump will overheat and may get damaged. Leave the water taps on in central posi- tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.

17Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

3Before the journeyChapter overview This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com- mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey. The instructions address the following topics:

keys registration connecting and detaching to the towing vehicle caravan coupling caravan control system manoeuvring system calculating the payload correct loading of the caravan external mirrors storing the television

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the most important points.

3.1 Keys

Two keys (Fig. 1) are included with the caravan. The keys fit the:

Conversion door Service flaps Toilet flap Gas bottle compartment flap

Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.

3.2 Registration Your caravan is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national regula- tions on registration. Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code sticker in addition to the EU plate.

Fig. 1 Keys

18 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

3.3 Connecting

Connecting: Connect the caravan (see section 3.4). The coupling jaw and the ball must interlock and are not to be loosely superposed. The coupling jaw must completely surround the ball. Connect the breakaway brake cable with a loop to a suitable anchorage point on the vehicle, do not attach to the tow ball. Thereby, observe the cable length: The cable must not trail on the ground or trigger the braking function around corners. Crank the jockey wheel up as far as possible. Adjust the running role in par- allel to the direction of travel and to the draw box. Insert the connector plug of the caravan in the socket of the towing vehicle. Ensure that the hooks of the safety cover engage with the plug. The hooks prevent the plug from becoming loose during the journey. Put the connection cable in a loose loop across the drawbar. Make sure that it does not touch the ground. Check whether the caravan coupling is mounted correctly on the coupling ball. Pay attention to the safety indicator.

Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci- dent and injury! No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during positioning for connecting and detaching. Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the towing vehicle. Nose weight and rear axle load must not be exceeded. The values of the nose weight and rear axle load are included in the docu- ments of the vehicle and the caravan coupling. Ensure that the interior of the coupling is not soiled and that the movable parts of the coupling (not the ball retainer) are lubricated. The tow ball is not to be lubricated when using a stabiliser. The friction pads are pressed against the coupling ball and thereby generate an anti- rolling moment. This anti-rolling effect is only guaranteed when the towing vehicle coupling head is free of lubricant and other residues. When lubricating the stabiliser ensure that no lubricant is on the friction pads.

Caravan with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach caravan with the overrun brake on. Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the instruction manual for the caravan coupling. Do not climb onto the drawbar covering risk of breakage! In order to connect the vehicle, crank the supporting jockey wheel down and set it down on the ground. Do not use the stabilising lever of the stabiliser as a maneuvering aid.

Check whether the caravan's connector plug fits into the socket of the towing vehicle. If connector plug and socket do not match, ask your author- ised dealers and workshops for adapting options. Further information about the stabiliser can be obtained in the manufac- turer's instruction manual.

19Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

Check whether corner steadies and jockey wheel are raised. Check the caravan lighting system whilst the towing vehicle is connected.

3.4 Caravan couplings

3.4.1 AKS 1300 stabiliser

Connecting: Pull up the stabilising lever (Fig. 2,1) as far as possible. Turn the handwheel (Fig. 2,2) in an anticlockwise direction as far as pos- sible in the open position. Pull the coupling handle (Fig. 2,3) upwards. Place the opened stabiliser on the caravan coupling. The coupling handle must audibly lock back into its initial position. In addition, push the coupling handle downwards by hand (not with your foot). Closing and securing is carried out automatically. Conduct a visual inspection: The green cylinder on the safety indicator (Fig. 2,4) must be visible. Turn handwheel in a clockwise direction until it can be felt and heard that the torque limiting mechanism grates. Push the stabilising lever down until the marking on the stabilising lever is aligned with that on the stabilising housing (Fig. 2,5).

Before connecting, ensure that the tow ball of the coupling device is free of dirt and grease.

Fig. 2 AKS 1300 stabiliser

20 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

3.4.2 AKS 3004 stabiliser

Connecting: Pull up the stabilising lever (Fig. 3,1) as far as possible. Pull the coupling handle (Fig. 3,2) upwards. Place the opened stabiliser on the caravan coupling. The coupling handle must audibly lock back into its initial position. In addition, push the coupling handle downwards by hand (not with your foot). Closing and securing is carried out automatically. Conduct a visual inspection: The green cylinder on the safety indicator (Fig. 3,3) must be visible. Activate the stabilising mechanism. Push the stabilising lever (Fig. 3,1) down to its stop limit. Conduct a visual inspection: The arrow (Fig. 4,2) must point to "2" (Fig. 4,1).

3.4.3 WS 3000 D stabiliser

Connecting: Pull the coupling handle (Fig. 5,1) upwards into position "Open" (Fig. 5,2). Stabiliser is open. Set down the open stabiliser on the caravan ball of the towing vehicle and release the coupling handle. The handle glides automatically back to its ini- tial position (Fig. 5,3). In addition, push the coupling handle down with your hand (not with your foot). Closing and securing is carried out automatically. Conduct a visual inspection: The caravan ball must not be visible in the attached state. Activate the stabilising mechanism. To do this, press the coupling handle downwards (Fig. 5,4) from the closed position (Fig. 5,3) to its stop limit.

Fig. 3 AKS 3004 stabiliser Fig. 4 Check "AKS closed"

Fig. 5 WS 3000 D stabiliser

21Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

To deactivate the stabilisation mechanism, e.g. for manoeuvring, pull the cou- pling handle (Fig. 5,1) slowly upward to the closed position (Fig. 5,3).

3.5 Caravan control system 3.5.1 Caravan control system (ATC) (special equipment)

Couple caravan. Use the connection cable to connect the caravan to the towing vehicle. The caravan control system starts a self test. The control LED (Fig. 6, 1) on the caravan lights up red for about 3 seconds. Check whether the control LED lights up green after the self test. The car- avan control system is now active.

3.5.2 Caravan control system (IDC) (special equipment)

The steady plus on the connection socket on the towing vehicle must be protected with 15 A or 20 A fuses. Fire hazard! The caravan control system cannot override the physically preset limits. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 100 km/h intended by the designers, and always adapt your speed to suit the weather, road and traffic conditions.

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 6 Control LED

1 Control LED

The steady plus on the connection socket on the towing vehicle must be protected with 14 A or 15 A fuses. Fire hazard! When the IDC performs the self-test, the caravan's brake linkage is actu- ated. Do not reach into the functional area of the brake linkage during the self-test. Danger of bruises! The caravan control system cannot override the physically preset limits. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 100 km/h intended by the designers, and always adapt your speed to suit the weather, road and traffic conditions.

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

22 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

The IDC is an auxiliary braking system. When the system identifies a haz- ardous situation (e.g. swinging motion by the caravan), it automatically slows down the caravan. However, this does not relieve the driver of responsibility.

Couple caravan. Use the connecting cable to connect the caravan to the towing vehicle. The caravan control system starts a self test. The control LED on the caravan flashes green. Check whether the control LED lights up green after the self test. The car- avan control system is now active.

3.6 Detaching

Detaching: Apply the caravan handbrake. Place the wheel chocks behind both of the wheels. Remove the connector plug of the caravan from the towing vehicle socket and insert it in the holder on the drawbar. Remove the breakaway cable from the towing vehicle. Crank the jockey wheel down until it is set firmly on the ground. Now loosen the caravan coupling. Using the jockey wheel, lift the drawbar until the towing vehicle can be driven away without risk.

3.7 Manoeuvring system

Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci- dent and injury! In addition, observe the safety instructions with respect to connecting included in this instruction manual.

Do not climb onto the drawbar covering risk of breakage!

No persons are to remain inside the caravan while it is being manoeu- vred. No persons (in particular children) are to remain inside the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring. In the event of malfunctions, apply the handbrake. Do not use the manoeuvring system as a handbrake. Store the remote control in a safe place inaccessible to children. Always swivel the drive rollers away from the tyres before commencing a journey. If the drive rollers are swivelled onto the tyres during the journey, the tyres could burst.

23Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

Using the manoeuvring system (Mover), the vehicle can be moved without any other aids.

Remote control

The vehicle is steered using the direction buttons on the remote control (Fig. 7). The following table describes the function of the individual direction buttons:

Before manoeuvring, check the tyres and drive rollers and if necessary, remove any sharp stones or similar objects. When manoeuvring on a slope, make sure the drawbar is facing downhill. This will prevent the vehicle from tilting backwards. Do not store sensitive devices like cameras of DVD players directly next to the control device or the cable. The manoeuvring system generates elec- tromagnetic fields that can damage such devices.

When manoeuvring, the interval between the remote control and the middle of the vehicle may be a maximum of 10 meters. After switching off the manoeuvring system via the remote control, the con- trol remains in stand-by mode. To shut the manoeuvring system down alto- gether, it must be disconnected from the battery. After manoeuvring is complete, pull the 13-pin plug from the safety socket. The living area battery can otherwise lose its charge. If both brake lights are defective, the circuit of the safety socket is not closed and the manoeuvring system will not work.

If the remote control is switched on and no button is pressed for approx. 2 minutes, or a button is pressed and held down for approx. 7 minutes, the remote control switches itself off. To reactivate the remote control, push the sliding switch to "OFF" (0), wait approx. 2 seconds and then push the sliding switch back to "ON" (I).

Fig. 7 Direction buttons

No. in Fig. 7

Movement Function

1 Vehicle forwards Both wheels turn forwards

2 Vehicle forwards to the left The right wheel turns forwards

3 Vehicle backwards to the left The right wheel turns backwards

4 Vehicle backwards Both wheels turn backwards

5 Vehicle backwards to the right The left wheel turns backwards

24 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

Manoeuvring: Detach vehicle (see section 3.6). Insert 13-pole plug into the safety socket of the manoeuvring system. Push the sliding switch (Fig. 8,3) on the remote control (Fig. 8,1) to "ON" (I). If the green LED (Fig. 8,2) lights up, the manoeuvring system is opera- tional. Swivel the drive rollers onto the tyres on both sides. To do so, press the "Engage" (Fig. 8,4 and 7) buttons. Release the handbrake and remove the wheel chocks. Move the vehicle into the required position using the direction buttons (Fig. 8,8). Apply the handbrake again (see section 5.1). Swivel the drive rollers away from the tyres on both sides. To do so, press the "Disengage" (Fig. 8,5 and 6) buttons. Push the sliding switch (Fig. 8,3) on the remote control to "OFF" (0).

3.8 Payload

6 Vehicle forwards to the right The left wheel turns forwards

3+6 The vehicle turns on the spot clockwise

The left wheel turns forwards and the right wheel turns backwards

2+5 The vehicle turns on the spot anti-clockwise

The left wheel turns backwards and the right wheel turns forwards

Fig. 8 Remote control

No. in Fig. 7

Movement Function

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to burst. You can lose control of the vehicle. Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to- drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with all luggage and personal objects) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.

25Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

Load the caravan so that the drawbar coupling head is not pushed downwards due to the permissible nose weight. Heavy objects should be close to the axles and a weight centre should be in the centre of the vehicle. When loading the caravan observe:

The permissible maximum caravan load The maximum permissible nose weight (e.g. 50 kg) The minimum nose weight in accordance with national regulations

This information is in the towing vehicle instruction manual.

3.8.1 Terms

Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden

condition

The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that a vehicle may never exceed. The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload. In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum per- missible gross weight in a laden condition.

Permitted mass The permitted mass is the weight specified by the manufacturer for issuing the type approval. The permitted mass must never exceed the maximum permis- sible gross weight of the loaded vehicle.

Mass in ready-to-drive condition

The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive standard vehicle. The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:

Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard equipment Basic equipment weight

Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:

Water system filled up to 100 % (water tank and pipes) Gas bottles filled up to 100 % A full heating system A full toilet flushing system

Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle documents by the payload. Built-in accessories and special equipment reduce the payload. Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.

Description Load (kg)

Maximum permitted payloads

Roof load 200

Bunk beds 100

Bike rack Double 35

Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight". However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for fixed formulations. All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1645-2.

26 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

The power cables for the 230 V power supply The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used

The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to- drive conditions.

Payload The payload is made up as follows:

Additional equipment Personal equipment

You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the following text.

Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples of additional equipment include:

Spare wheel Bike rack Satellite unit Microwave oven Hot water supply

Chapter 15 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they may also be obtained from the manufacturer.

Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in the additional equipment. For example, personal equipment can include the following:

Foodstuffs Crockery Television Radio Clothes Bedding Toys Books Toiletries

No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:

Bikes Boats Surfboards Sports equipment

Example for calculating the basic equipment

Water tank with 40 l 40 kg

Gas bottles (2 x 11 kg gas + 2 x 14 kg bottle) + 50 kg

Boiler with 10 l + 10 kg

230 V power cable + 4 kg

Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg

Total = 124 kg

The vehicle's payload can be increased by reducing the weight in a ready- to-drive condition. To do this, it is allowed for example to empty the fluid containers or to remove the gas bottles.

27Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the man- ufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the fol- lowing formula:

Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L + 30

Explanation N = maximum number of beds, as stated by the manufacturer L = total length of the caravan in metres, not including the drawbar

Example Caravan with 4 beds and a length of 5 m: Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x 4 beds + 10 x 5 metres + 30 = 120 kg

3.8.2 Calculating the payload

The payload (see section 3.8.1) is the difference in weight between

Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.

The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum per- missible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manu- facturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value. Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks, full gas bottles and complete addi- tional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual payload be deter- mined. The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight. The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal equipment.

The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition must not be exceeded. Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to- drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with all luggage and personal objects) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.

Mass in kg to be calculated

Calculation

Example for calculating the payload

Maximum permissible gross weight ac- cording to vehicle documents

1500

Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condi- tion, including basic equipment according to vehicle documents

- 1200

This results in a permissible payload of

300

Additional equipment - 40

For the personal equipment this re- sults in

= 260

28 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

3.8.3 Loading the caravan correctly

The payload arrangement recommended cannot be adhered to consequently as the storage facilities are to be found throughout the complete caravan. Ensure that heavy items are close to the axles and the lower area, i.e. directly above the vehicle floor. Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.), if pos- sible, in the towing vehicle.

Incorrectly loaded Loads stored apart from each other (Fig. 9) lead to inclination to skid.

Correctly loaded Do not store heavy objects such as awnings, tin cans, etc. in the caravan but rather in the towing vehicle. Secure bicycles on the roof of the towing vehicle. Store all loads close to the axle (Fig. 10).

Never exceed the maximum permissible gross weight. Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle. Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip. Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles. Low-lying storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direction of travel are particularly suited for storing heavy objects. Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets. Never concentrate the caravan load at the rear.

For vehicles with tandem axles, distribute the weight centre over both axles.

Fig. 9 Incorrect weight distribution

Fig. 10 Correct weight distribution

29Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

3.8.4 Caravan load, nose weight and axle load

Caravan load The caravan load (Fig. 11,1) stipulated in the towing vehicle documents pro- vides information as to the maximum weight which the towing vehicle is per- mitted to tow. The caravan load refers to the actual weight of the caravan and not to the maximum permissible gross weight of the caravan.

Example The towing vehicle may tow 1,200 kg. If the caravan has a maximum permis- sible gross weight of 1,200 kg and in fact weighs 900 kg, it can be loaded with another 300 kg. If however the caravan has a maximum permissible gross weight of 1,400 kg, it may only be loaded to a maximum of 1,200 kg.

Nose weight The nose weight (Fig. 11,2) specifies how much weight the caravan drawbar can apply to the caravan coupling of the towing vehicle. Information is to be found in description of the caravan couplings and the vehicle documents. Therefore, a caravan coupling with a permissible nose weight of 50 kg may not support a loaded caravan which has a nose weight of 75 kg. Additionally, for the permissible gross weight the nose weight must be taken into considera- tion. If necessary the payload in the towing vehicle must be reduced by the amount of the nose weight. The maximum permissible gross weight for the towing vehicle and for the car- avan is not to be exceeded. Only when the nose weight is adapted optimal to the towing vehicle and car- avan combination, the towing vehicle and caravan achieves its maximum sta- bility and safety in highway traffic. The optimal nose weight is simultaneously the maximum possible nose weight.

Please refer to the vehicle documents and the description of the caravan coupling for the maximum permissible nose weight. If different values are specified in the vehicle documents and in the descrip- tion of the caravan coupling: Please select the lowest value. This value is the maximum possible nose weight for the towing vehicle and caravan.

The nose weight of the caravan may not exceed 100 kg.

The information on the towing vehicle documents is important for the selec- tion of the car and caravan.

Fig. 11 Caravan load, nose weight and axle load

1 Caravan load 2 Nose weight 3 Axle load

30 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

Check the nose weight before each journey, e.g. with a nose weighing scales. To obtain a correct value, position the nose weighing scales vertical under the coupling jaw and place the caravan drawbar horizontal. The payload in the caravan must be distributed in such a way that the measured nose weight comes as close as possible to the maximum per- missible nose weight. The maximum permissible nose weight is not be exceeded.

Axle load The axle load (Fig. 11,3) is also specified in the vehicle documents of the towing vehicle and provides information concerning the permissible maximum load for the front and rear axles. The axle load may not be exceeded by a trailer. The above illustration shows where which forces act on the car and car- avan.

3.8.5 Bike rack (special equipment)

Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the bike rack. Do not fall below the minimum nose weight. Bicycles may protrude at the side by a maximum of 40 cm, measured from the outer edge of the tail lights. However, a total width of 2.5 m must not be exceeded. Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly. The lateral overhang must be marked with a red flag. Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. two units). Fasten bicycles using the straps provided and check to see that they are secure after you have driven a few kilometres. Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the first 10 km and then at each break in the journey. Do not use the bike rack as luggage rack or ladder.

The bike rack is only to be used for transporting bicycles. The gross weight specified by the manufacturer must not be exceeded. The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered. The maximum permissible payload of the bike rack is 35 kg. When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the vehicle wall. Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted. Before every journey, check: Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly? Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack belts?

31Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

Front bike rack The bike rack is attached to the struts of the drawbar with the installation mate- rial.

Loading the bicycles: Put the bikes on to the bike rack (Fig. 12,2) and secure them with quick straps (Fig. 12,1).

Bike rack on the rear wall Depending on the model, the bike rack is either screwed directly onto the rear wall or clipped into special brackets at the rear. Beneath the vehicle the bike rack is screwed to the floor plate.

Loading the bicycles: Put the bikes onto the bike rack and secure them with quick straps. In addition, secure each bicycle on the retaining bracket or retaining arm.

3.9 External mirrors

Fig. 12 Front bike rack

Fig. 13 Bike rack on the rear wall

Before every journey, re-adjust the external mirrors on the towing vehicle for safety reasons.

Additional mirrors must be EC-type certified and thus meet the EC guide- lines.

32 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

When towing a trailer, the towing vehicle must be equipped with two external mirrors. The external mirrors ensure that the roadway next to the trailer can be clearly seen.

The following applies when purchasing additional mirrors

If possible, take the towing vehicle and caravan with you. Test on site to see if they fit. Check that the mirror is suitable for the vehicle and the seating position of the driver.

3.10 Television (special equipment)

3.11 Road safety

Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:

Fig. 14 External mirrors

Before commencing the journey, remove the television from the support and store it securely. Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet. Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi- tion. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.

If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen television in the vehicle.

Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from chapter 6.

Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

33Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey 3

No. Checks Checked

Towing vehicle with caravan

1 All vehicle documents are on board

2 Two external mirrors fitted to towing vehicle

3 Nose weight has not been exceeded or fallen below the mini- mum

4 Tyres in proper condition

5 Road lighting system working

6 Overrun brake functions correctly

7 Brakes react evenly

8 When braking, the towing vehicle and caravan remain in the lane

9 Total height determined and noted. Keep the height informa- tion close at hand in the towing vehicle

Housing body, outside 10 Awning completely retracted

11 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)

12 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away

13 External supports removed

14 Corner steadies and jockey wheel cranked as high as possible

15 Wheel chocks removed and stored away

16 Entrance step is stored securely or retracted

17 External flaps closed and locked

18 Conversion door locked

Housing body, inside 19 Windows and skylights closed and locked

20 Television removed from the support and securely stored

21 Flat screen secured

22 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)

23 Loose parts stored away or fixed in position

24 Open storage spaces empty

25 No gas cartridges or other easily flammable materials stored in the roof cupboard of the awning light

26 Refrigerator door secured

27 Refrigerator set to 12 V operation

28 All drawers and flaps closed

29 Inner doors and table secured

Gas system 30 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that they are unable to turn

31 If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top

32 Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are closed

34 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Before the journey3

Electrical system 33 Check the battery voltage of the living area battery (see chapter 8). If a battery voltage is displayed on the panel which is too low then the living area battery must be re-charged. Ob- serve the notes and instructions in chapter 8

Commence journey with fully charged living area bat- tery.

Water system housing body

34 Mobile waste water tank stored away and secured in the gas bottle compartment

35 Water system emptied in case of risk of frost. Watertaps and drain cocks open

No. Checks Checked

35Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

During the journey 4

4During the journeyChapter overview This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the caravan. The instructions address the following topics:

driving speed brakes driving in reverse

4.1 Driving with the caravan

The main differences between driving with a caravan and driving without a car- avan are the increased vehicle width and length, a decreased acceleration and an increased vehicle stopping distance. Therefore, adapt your driving tech- nique to the altered road behaviour resulting from driving with a caravan.

4.2 Brakes

Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:

Does the overrun brake function? Do the brakes react evenly? Do the towing vehicle and the caravan remain in the lane when braking?

4.3 Driving in reverse

As far as all models with an automatic reverse driving mechanism are con- cerned, the caravan can be reversed without difficulty. In addition to the rolling resistance, residual braking power must be taken into account.

During the journey, no persons are to travel inside the caravan. The caravan constructions were designed for a maximum permissible speed of 100 km/h (60 mph). Therefore never drive faster than 100 km/ h (60 mph). Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries (see chapter 17).

Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author- ised specialist workshop.

When driving in reverse, the caravan reacts in exactly the opposite direc- tion to the steering movements of the towing vehicle. If you steer the towing vehicle to the left, the caravan moves to the right. Never back up without a second person to direct you.

36 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

During the journey4

Driving in reverse: Drive up to the entrance until the rear of the caravan is roughly level with the entrance (Fig. 15). Steer the stationary towing vehicle and trailer to the left (Fig. 16). Reverse with caution. The caravan moves to the right.

As soon as both vehicles are at an approximate angle of 120 to each other, come to a stop (Fig. 17). Steer to the right and reverse with caution (Fig. 18). Continue to reverse, correcting the steering if necessary. For the last 2 to 3 m, steer to the left once more so that the towing vehicle and trailer are in line.

Fig. 15 Approach Fig. 16 Steer to the left

Fig. 17 Approach Fig. 18 Steer to the right

The angle between the vehicles must not be too narrow, otherwise the cor- ners will bump against each other. This can cause major damage to the vehicles. Get someone to direct you!

37Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Pitching the caravan 5

5Pitching the caravanChapter overview This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

handbrake wheel chocks operation of the supports entrance step mobile waste water tank 230 V connection refrigerator aligning the antenna

5.1 Handbrake

Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.

To release it, push the handbrake (Fig. 19,1) forwards.

5.2 Wheel chocks Use the two wheel chocks even when the upward or downward gradients are of a minimum.

5.3 Corner steadies

Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling.

Do not climb onto the drawbar covering risk of breakage!

Fig. 19 Handbrake

Do not use the fitted corner steadies as a vehicle jack. The corner steadies are only for stabilising the pitched vehicle. The vehicle wheels are not to be raised above the ground. When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the corner steadies are evenly loaded. Before driving away, wind up the corner steadies as far as they can go.

38 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Pitching the caravan5

In order to stabilise the pitched caravan use the corner steadies fitted as standard. With the assistance of the jockey wheel position the pitched caravan in a hor- izontal position. For control purposes use a small spirit level. Crank down the corner steadies after the caravan is in an absolutely horizontal position.

Cranking down: Place the hand crank handle provided as standard on the hexagonal nut (Fig. 20,1 or Fig. 21,1) of the corner steady (Fig. 20,2 or Fig. 21,2). Rotate the hand crank in a clockwise direction. The corner steady is swung downwards.

Cranking upwards: Turn the crank handle in an anticlockwise direction. The corner steady is swung upwards.

5.4 Entrance step (free-standing)

Place the entrance step (Fig. 22,1) in front of the entrance to the caravan.

When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground.

Fig. 20 Corner steady cranked down (variant 1)

Fig. 21 Corner steady cranked down (variant 2)

Make sure that the entrance step stands on secure and level ground. This will prevent the entrance step from toppling over. Do not step on the edges of the entrance step. Danger of slipping! Secure the entrance step to the ground, for example, with tent pegs. This way the entrance step cannot slip away.

Fig. 22 Entrance step (free-standing)

39Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Pitching the caravan 5

5.5 Waste water tank, mobile (special equipment)

The waste water tank (Fig. 23,1) is stored inside the caravan gas bottle com- partment during the journey. The drain pipe (Fig. 23,3) of the caravan is located at the bottom of the vehicle - on the left hand side in the direction of travel. Before using the water system: Place the waste water tank under the caravan in such a way that the opening (Fig. 23,2) of the waste water tank is under the drain pipe.

5.6 230 V connection The vehicle can be connected to a 230 V power supply (see chapter 8).

5.7 Refrigerator The 12 V operation of the refrigerator is only possible when a towing vehicle is connected and the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is switched off, switch the refrigerator to 230 V operation or gas operation.

5.8 Satellite unit (special equipment)

5.8.1 Equipment with automatic antenna alignment (Alden) The satellite unit is equipped with an automatic positioning unit. This automatic positioning unit ensures that the antennas are aligned accurately. The flat screen incorporates a digital receiver. The satellite unit is operated via remote control.

Fig. 23 Waste water tank, mobile

Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi- tion. Danger of accidents!

The vehicle must be still during the satellite search. Do not walk through the vehicle. Satellite reception is only possible, when the antenna is positioned in direct line of sight of the chosen satellite and the view is not blocked in any way. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

40 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Pitching the caravan5

Setting up the unit: Switch on the television.

Press the key " " (Fig. 24,2) on the remote control. The satellite antenna repositions itself out of the park position and into search mode. When the unit finds the satellite, you will hear a signal tone. Use the memory buttons (Fig. 24,3) or the function buttons (Fig. 24,4) to set the required transmitter.

5.8.2 Equipment with semi-automatic antenna alignment (Alden) The satellite unit is equipped with a semi-automatic positioning unit. The flat screen incorporates a digital receiver. The satellite unit is operated via remote control.

Switching on the satellite unit:

Switch on the television.

Press the key " " (Fig. 25,2) on the remote control for the television. The unit switches to search mode. You will hear a continuous tone.

Press the key " " on the remote control for the antenna. The satellite antenna lifts out of the park position and moves to the last position entered. To switch to television reception on the TV remote control, press the TV button (Fig. 25,1). The signal tone will stop. An image will appear on the screen.

Setting up the antenna: Use the memory buttons (Fig. 25,3) on the TV remote control or the func- tion buttons (Fig. 25,4) to select the desired station.

On the remote control for the antenna, use the keys " " or " " to correct the angle of the antenna in accordance with the enclosed cards. Loosen antenna mast clamp.

Fig. 24 Remote control

Fig. 25 Remote control for television

41Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Pitching the caravan 5

Turn antenna slowly. When the antenna finds the satellite, you will hear a signal tone. Optimise the reception by turning and tilting the antenna. Slightly retighten the antenna mast clamp.

Lowering the antenna for driving:

Loosen antenna mast clamp. Turn the antenna until the slot in the clamp and the slot in the antenna mast are congruent with each other.

Press the key " " on the remote control for the antenna. The satellite antenna moves into park position. Check whether the antenna is fully lowered and points to the rear of the vehicle. Slightly retighten the antenna mast clamp. Switch off the television.

5.8.3 Equipment with automatic antenna alignment (Oyster)

The satellite unit is equipped with an automatic positioning unit. This automatic positioning unit ensures that the antennas are precisely aligned to the desired satellites. Operation is menu-controlled (TV screen) using the remote control.

Setting up the unit: Switch on the television. Use the mains switch to switch on the receiver. When the green LED on the receiver's infra-red receptor lights up, the receiver is ready to operate. Switch on the receiver with the remote control. The satellite antenna repo- sitions itself out of the park position and into search mode.

When the system finds the satellite, the selected TV programme appears auto- matically.

Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi- tion. Danger of accidents!

The vehicle must be still during the satellite search. Do not walk through the vehicle. Satellite reception is only possible, when the antenna is positioned in direct line of sight of the chosen satellite and the view is not blocked in any way. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

42 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Pitching the caravan5

43Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

6LivingChapter overview This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

opening and closing the doors and external flaps light switches adjusting the halogen spotlights positioning the television heating the vehicle ventilation of the vehicle opening and closing the windows and blinds opening and closing the skylights converting tables use of the beds

6.1 Conversion door

6.1.1 Conversion door, outside

Opening: Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 26,1) and turn towards the " " symbol. The door lock is unlatched. Return the key to the central position and remove it. Pull on the handle (Fig. 26,2). The door is open.

Locking: Insert the key into the locking cylinder (Fig. 26,1) and turn towards the " " symbol. The door lock is locked. Return the key to the central position and remove it.

Only drive with locked doors.

Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g. during an accident. Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights. When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.

Fig. 26 Door lock of conversion door, outside

For conversion doors with a left-hand opening, locking and opening is done in the reverse directions to those of the conversion door shown.

44 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.1.2 Conversion door, inside

Opening: Push the handle (Fig. 27,1) down.

Locking: Turn the handle (Fig. 27,1) approx. 45 upward and leave it in this position.

6.1.3 Window conversion door (Seitz) (special equipment) The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.

Closing: Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 28,2) in the middle of the holding bar (Fig. 28,1), pull it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at this height.

Opening: Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the holding bar and push it down.

Fig. 27 Door lock of conversion door, inside

Fig. 28 Roman shade

45Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

6.1.4 Folding insect screen on the conversion door (special equipment)

Closing: Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 29,1).

Opening: Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 29,1).

6.2 External flaps

The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylin- ders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.

Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.

Fig. 29 Insect screen

Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them. To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted to the external flap.

When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.

46 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.2.1 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped

Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 30,1) and turn a quarter turn in an anti- clockwise direction. The lock handle (Fig. 30,2) snaps out. Remove the key. Turn lock handle one quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. The flap lock is open.

Closing: Firmly close the external flap. Turn lock handle in a clockwise direction until it is horizontal. The flap lock is now engaged but not locked. Insert key into locking cylinder. Press down lock handle with key inserted and turn key a quarter turn in a clockwise direction. The lock handle will stay bolted. Remove the key.

6.2.2 Flap lock, rectangular

Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 31,1) and turn a quarter turn. The lock handle (Fig. 31,2) snaps out. Remove the key. Turn the lock handle one quarter turn. The flap lock is open.

During rain, water can penetrate the opened flap lock. Therefore close the lock handle.

Fig. 30 Flap lock, elliptical-shaped, closed

Fig. 31 Flap lock, rectangular, closed

47Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Closing: Firmly close the external flap. Turn lock handle until it is horizontal. The flap lock is now engaged but not locked. Insert key into locking cylinder. Press down lock handle with key inserted and turn key a quarter turn. The lock handle will stay bolted. Remove the key.

6.2.3 Flap for toilet cassette

Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 32,1) of the push-button lock and turn a quarter turn. Remove the key. Press both push-button locks (Fig. 32,2) simultaneously with your thumb and open the flap for the toilet cassette.

Closing: Close the flap for the toilet cassette and press it shut. Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 32,1) and turn a quarter turn. Remove the key.

6.2.4 Flap for the 230 V connection, square

Opening: Reach into the recessed grip (Fig. 33,1) on the external flap (Fig. 33,2) and swing the external flap upward.

Closing: Swivel the external flap downwards and press it shut.

Fig. 32 Flap for toilet cassette

Fig. 33 Flap for the 230 V connection

1 Recessed grip 2 External flap

48 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.2.5 Cap for the drinking water filler neck (only for water tank 40 l)

Opening: Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 34,2 or Fig. 35,2) and turn it in an anticlockwise direction. Remove cap.

Closing: Insert the cap in the drinking water filler neck. Turn key in a clockwise direction. Remove the key.

6.3 Furniture flaps

6.3.1 Furniture flaps with push button

Opening: Press inner part of the lock. The push button jumps out (Fig. 36). Hold push button and open furniture flap.

Fig. 34 Cap for the drinking water filler neck

Fig. 35 Cap for the drinking water filler neck (alternative)

The drinking water filler neck is labelled by the word "WASSER" (water)

(Fig. 34,1) or marked by the symbol " " (Fig. 35,1).

Before commencing the journey, close all furniture flaps and inner doors and lock them. The furniture flaps shown in this section are examples. Depending on the model, the locks and handles on the furniture flaps may differ to those dis- played here.

Fig. 36 Furniture flap with push button

49Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Closing: Press furniture flap shut. Press push button in until it locks. The furniture flap is closed correctly when the fastener locks into place.

6.3.2 Furniture flaps with handle

Opening: Pull handle (Fig. 37) until furniture flap is open.

Closing: Push down furniture flap until flap hinge perceptibly closes.

6.3.3 Furniture flaps with release handle

Opening: Press the release handle (Fig. 38,1) down and keep it pressed. Pull the release handle until the furniture flap is open.

Closing: Press the furniture flap down until you can feel the flap hinge close and hear the lock snap into place.

Fig. 37 Furniture flap with handle (example)

Fig. 38 Furniture flap with release handle

50 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.4 Light switch 6.4.1 Entrance area

The entrance area has light switches for the following lamps:

Seating group lighting (Fig. 39,1) Awning light (Fig. 39,2 and Fig. 39,3)

6.4.2 Living area

The light switches in the living area are located directly on the corresponding lamp (Fig. 41,1) or next to the lamp (Fig. 42,1).

6.5 Spotlight

Fig. 39 Light switch Fig. 40 Awning light

For models without the light switch (Fig. 39,2) the awning light (Fig. 40) is switched on or off using the rocker switch (Fig. 39,3). The light switches have different layouts according to the model.

The lamps shown in this section are examples. Not all lamps used in the vehicle are shown. The examples are intended to clarify the possible posi- tions for the light switches. The type and appearance of the light switches can deviate from those shown here.

Fig. 41 Interior light, switch mounted directly on the lamp

Fig. 42 Interior light, light switch sepa- rate from the lamp

Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching them. If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety dis- tance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

51Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Turning: Grasp the housing (Fig. 43,1) and turn it.

The housing can be turned in different directions:

To the left and to the right Up and down

6.6 Holder for flat screen

6.6.1 Holder on the column The holder for the flat screen is attached to a column.

Positioning: Push the release lever (Fig. 44,2) to the side and turn the holder (Fig. 44,3) with the flat screen to the desired position. Press flat screen slightly upward and swivel it to the desired position. Three different inclination angles may be used.

Fig. 43 Spotlight

Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.

If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen television in the vehicle.

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 44 Holder on the column

52 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

Storing away: Turn flat screen back until the holder (Fig. 44,3) engages in the lock (Fig. 44,1).

6.6.2 Holder in the TV cabinet The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.

Positioning: Push the unlocking bar (Fig. 45,1) in. Pull out the extension (Fig. 45,2) as far as possible. Swivel flat screen into the desired position.

Storing away: Swing back flat screen into its original position. Push in the extension (Fig. 45,2) until the unlocking bar (Fig. 45,1) engages.

6.7 Heating

6.8 Ventilation

Fig. 45 Holder in the TV cabinet

During heater operation, the exhaust gas pipe in the wardrobe will get hot. Therefore do not keep any heat-sensitive garments right next to the exhaust gas pipe (see also chapter 9).

The operation of the heater is described in chapter 9.

The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven- tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO2 levels.

Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the floor). Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. lifting roof edges, mushroom-shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).

53Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation and resulting mould is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season, a pleasant living climate is created if heating output, air distribution and venti- lation are synchronised. If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, espe- cially in summer as heat accumulation can occur. Do not only air the interior, but also the storage compartments which are accessible from the outside. Air the parking place as well if the vehicle is parked in a closed space (e.g. garage). The occurrence of condensation could lead to the formation of mould.

6.9 Windows The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position. Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear. If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the window. The window could be damaged. Therefore, if the shade is installed in the bottom blind box, close the shade only 2/3 when sunlight is intense. This allows the heat to escape between the window and the shade. If the shade is installed in the top blind box, close the shade fully and open it regularly. Also move the window into the "continuous ventilation" position. Before commencing the journey, close the windows. Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent mois- ture from entering. To open and close the window, open or close all catch levers which are fitted to the window.

When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows. In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.

54 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.9.1 Hinged window with rotary hinges

Opening: Turn the catch lever (Fig. 46,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window. Open the hinged window until the required position has been reached and use knurled knob (Fig. 47,1) to secure in position.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing: Turn knurled knob (Fig. 47,1) until the latch is released. Close the hinged window. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 46,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 46,2) is located on the inside of the window catch (Fig. 46,1).

Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in 2 positions:

"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 48) Firmly closed (Fig. 46)

When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.

Fig. 46 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 47 Hinged window with rotary hinges, open

Fig. 48 Catch lever in the "continuous ventilation" position

55Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

Turn the catch lever (Fig. 48,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window. Lightly open the hinged window outwards. Return the catch lever to its initial position. The locking catch (Fig. 48,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 48,1).

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position. If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win- dows completely.

6.9.2 Hinged window with automatic hinges

Opening: Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window. Open the hinged window to the desired latched position. The automatic hinge (Fig. 50,1) locks in place automatically.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing: Open the hinged window as wide as necessary until the latch releases. Close the hinged window. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 49,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 49,2) is located on the inside of the window catch (Fig. 49,1).

Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure. When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly.

Fig. 49 Catch lever in "closed" position Fig. 50 Hinged window with automatic hinges, open

56 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:

"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 51) "Firmly closed" (Fig. 49).

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

Turn the catch lever (Fig. 51,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window. Slightly open the hinged window outwards. Turn the catch lever a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 51,2) has to be moved into the recess of window catch (Fig. 51,1).

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position. If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win- dows completely.

6.9.3 Blind and insect screen

The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect screen are adjusted separately.

Fig. 51 Catch lever in the "continuous ventilation" position

Open blinds before commencing the journey. When the blinds are closed, vibrations can damage the spring shaft.

Depending on the window size, the blinds are fitted with one or two han- dles.

57Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Blind The blind is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 52,2) downwards. If the blind is to be com- pletely closed, it is suspended into the locking devices (Fig. 52,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.

Opening: If the blind is completely closed: Press handle (Fig. 52,2) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The blind can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame. If the blind is in an intermediate position: Pull the handle (Fig. 52,2) slightly downwards until the locking device releases. Use handle to return blind slowly to its initial position.

Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 52,1) down and hang it into the locking devices (Fig. 52,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.

Opening: Press handle (Fig. 52,1) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The insect screen can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

6.9.4 Roman shade and insect screen (special equipment) The windows are fitted with a Roman shade and an insect screen. The insect screen can only be operated together with the roman shade.

Roman shade The Roman shade is located in the upper blind box.

Fig. 52 Hinged window

Fig. 53 Hinged window

58 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

Closing: Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 53,1) using the holding bar (Fig. 53,2), pull it from the bottom to the top and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at this height.

Opening: Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the holding bar and push it up.

Insect screen The insect screen is located in the bottom blind box.

Closing: Pull the insect screen (Fig. 53,3) upwards using the handle (Fig. 53,4) until it pushes against the Roman shade (Fig. 53,1). Lock the insect screen in position with the Roman shade.

Opening: Tilt the handle (Fig. 53,4) attached to the insect screen. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

6.10 Skylights Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced venti- lation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.

The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.

The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position. Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear. If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight slightly or move it to ventilation position. Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent mois- ture from entering. Do not climb on the skylights. Before commencing the journey, close the skylights. Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and locked.

When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.

59Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

6.10.1 Heki skylight (mini and midi) (partially special equipment)

The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.

Opening: Press the safety knob (Fig. 54,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 54,1) down with both hands. Pull the bar (Fig. 55,1) in the guides (Fig. 55,2) to the rearmost position (Fig. 55,3).

Closing: Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 55,1) slightly upwards. Push the bar back in the guides. Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob (Fig. 54,2).

Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position (Fig. 56,1) and central position (Fig. 56,2). Depending on the model, the sky- light can be locked in the central position with the latch (Fig. 57,1).

Press the safety knob (Fig. 54,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 54,1) down with both hands. Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 55,2) to the desired position. Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 56,1 or 2) and lock if necessary.

Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:

Closing: Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Fig. 54 Safety knob on the Heki sky- light

Fig. 55 Heki skylight, guide

Fig. 56 Heki skylight in ventilation position

Fig. 57 Ventilation position locking mechanism

60 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

Opening: Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing: Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman shade.

Opening: Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

6.10.2 Heki skylight (partially special equipment)

The Heki skylight may be opened on one side only.

Opening: Press the safety knob (Fig. 58,1) and turn the catch lever (Fig. 58,2) one quarter turn inward. Pull the bar (Fig. 58,4) downwards out of the latch. Press the Heki skylight upwards using the bar. Press the bar back into the latch.

Closing: Pull the bar (Fig. 58,4) downwards out of the latch. Pull the Heki skylight downward using the bar. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 58,2 and Fig. 59,2) one quarter turn. The hook of the roof lock (Fig. 59,5) must engage in the upper locking fork (Fig. 59,3). Press the bar back into the latch.

Ventilation position (variant 1):

Open Heki skylight and push lightly outwards. Press the safety knob (Fig. 59,1) and turn the catch lever (Fig. 59,2) back. The hook of the roof lock (Fig. 59,5) must engage in the lower locking fork (Fig. 59,4). Press the bar back into the latch.

Fig. 58 Heki skylight, closed Fig. 59 Heki skylight in ventilation position 1

61Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Ventilation position (variant 2):

Open Heki skylight. Insert the bar (Fig. 60,3) into the holder (Fig. 60,1). Place the lever (Fig. 60,2) over the bar.

Blind To close and open the blind:

Closing: Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 61,2) to the opposite handle of the insect screen (Fig. 61,1) and allow to engage.

Opening: Hold the blind screen by the handle with one hand. With your other hand, push the unlocking bar on the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 61,1) towards the handle. The lock is released. Use handle to return the blind slowly to its initial position.

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing: Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 61,1) to the opposite handle of the blind (Fig. 61,2) and allow to engage.

Opening: Hold the insect screen (Fig. 61,1) by the handle and push the unlocking bar towards the handle. The lock is released. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

Fig. 60 Heki skylight in ventilation position 2

Fig. 61 Heki skylight, blind lock

62 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.11 Tables 6.11.1 Suspension table with folding leg

The suspension table may also be used as a bed foundation.

Conversion to bed foundation:

Slightly lift the front of the table-top. Move the locking device (Fig. 62,4) toward the table-top. Fold the lower section of the foot (Fig. 62,3) under by 90. Detach the suspension table from the upper attachment rail (Fig. 62,1). Attach the suspension table to the lower attachment rail (Fig. 62,2) and rest it onto the table leg hinge.

6.11.2 Lift-off table, movable

The top of the lift-off table can be moved.

Moving the table-top: Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 63,3). Move table-top (Fig. 63,2) to the desired position. Retighten the knurled screw.

The table's lifting mechanism enables it to be also used as a bed foundation.

Conversion to bed foundation:

Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 63,1) to the left. The lock of the lifting mecha- nism is open. Press table-top (Fig. 63,2) in the middle down to the stop limit and hold it down. Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 63,1) to the right (Fig. 63). The lifting mecha- nism is locked.

Fig. 62 Suspension table with folding leg

Fig. 63 Lift-off table, movable

63Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

Conversion to table: Swivel the catch lever (Fig. 63,1) to the left. The lock of the lifting mecha- nism is open. The table-top moves upwards to the limit stop. Swivel the catch lever to the right (Fig. 63). The lifting mechanism is locked.

6.12 Beds 6.12.1 Bunk bed

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed can be used immediately, without additional conversion. Always use the access ladder provided to climb up to the top bed.

6.12.2 Fixed bed (manual setup)

The bedding box is located underneath the bed. The bedding box may be used to store bedding. Fold up the slatted frame to place items in the bedding box or to empty it. Depending on the model, a rail has been fitted to the slatted frame to set it up.

Opening: Lift the slatted frame (Fig. 64,1), release the rail (Fig. 64,2) from its bracing and insert into the cavity in the holder (Fig. 64,3).

Closing: Lift the slatted frame (Fig. 64,1), release the rail (Fig. 64,2) from the holder (Fig. 64,3) and clamp into the bracing. Carefully let go of the slatted frame.

Only use the upper bunk bed if the safety guard is fitted. The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg. The upper bunk bed must not be used by children under 6 years of age. Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision. But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed. Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

Do not let the slatted frame fall down when closing the bed!

Fig. 64 Fixed bed

64 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.12.3 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)

A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside of the vehicle.

Opening: Lift the mattress forwards and set it down on the panel. Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 65,1) hold the slatted frame open.

Closing: Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pres- sure springs. If necessary, push the mattress behind the panel.

6.12.4 Fixed bed (adjustable head section)

Depending on the configuration, the head section of the slatted frame can be adjusted in several stages.

Raising the head section: Raise the head section (Fig. 66,2) of the slatted frame to the desired posi- tion. The support (Fig. 66,1) locks automatically into place.

The head section remains locked in the required position.

Lowering the head section: Raise the head section (Fig. 66,2) of the slatted frame until the lock is released. Guide the head section downwards slowly.

Fig. 65 Fixed bed

Do not let the slatted frame fall down when closing the bed!

Fig. 66 Adjustable head section

65Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

6.12.5 Widening single beds (special equipment)

Remove the bedside locker cover (Fig. 67,2) and put it to one side. Pull out slatted frame (Fig. 68,4) completely. To do this, pull on the exten- sion (Fig. 68,3). Place the additional cushion (Fig. 69,5) on the bedside locker. Place the additional cushion (Fig. 69,6) between the mattresses (Fig. 69,1).

Fig. 67 Prior to conversion

Fig. 68 During conversion

Fig. 69 After conversion

1 Mattress 2 Bedside locker cover 3 Bedside locker extension 4 Slatted frame 5 Additional cushion 6 Additional cushion

66 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping 6.13.1 Bench and central seating group without additional cushion

Convert the table (Fig. 70,3) to a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 71,2) into the centre. Insert the back cushions (Fig. 71,1) between the seat cushions and the wall.

Fig. 70 Prior to conversion

Fig. 71 After conversion

1 Back cushion 2 Seat cushion 3 Table

67Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

6.13.2 Round seating group with square table

Convert the table (Fig. 72,3) to a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Remove the back cushions (Fig. 73,4 and 5) and lay them aside. Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 73,2) into the centre of the table. Insert the back cushions (Fig. 73,1) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall. Observe the wedged form. Place the additional cushion (Fig. 74,6) between the seat cushions.

Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and position to the one shown here.

Fig. 72 Prior to conversion

Fig. 73 During conversion

Fig. 74 After conversion

1 Back cushion 2 Seat cushion 3 Table 4 Back cushion 5 Back cushion 6 Additional cushion (basic or foldable)

68 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

6.13.3 Round seating group without additional cushion

Convert the table (Fig. 75,3) to a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Remove the back cushions (Fig. 76,6, 7 and 8) and lay them aside. Pull the seat cushions (Fig. 76,2 and 4) into the centre of the table. Insert the back cushions (Fig. 77,1 and 5) between the seat cushions and the exterior wall. Observe the wedged form.

Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and position to the one shown here.

Fig. 75 Prior to conversion

Fig. 76 During conversion

Fig. 77 After conversion

1 Back cushion 2 Seat cushion 3 Table 4 Seat cushion 5 Back cushion 6 Back cushion 7 Back cushion 8 Back cushion

69Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living 6

6.13.4 Round seating group with additional cushion (foldable)

Convert the table (Fig. 78,3) to a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Remove all back cushions (Fig. 79,1, 4 and 5) and lay them aside. Unfold the additional cushion (Fig. 80,6) and lay it between the seat cush- ions (Fig. 80,2).

Depending on the model, the seating group can be different in shape and position to the one shown here.

Fig. 78 Prior to conversion

Fig. 79 During conversion

Fig. 80 After conversion

1 Back cushion 2 Seat cushion 3 Table 4 Back cushion 5 Back cushion 6 Additional cushion (foldable)

70 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Living6

71Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system 7

7Gas systemChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

safety changing the gas bottles gas isolator taps external gas connection automatic switching facility the gas alarm system

The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in chapter 9.

7.1 General

Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap on the gas bottle. No appliance operated by a naked flame (e.g. heater or refrigerator) may be in operation when filling the tank, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Do not use appliances operated with a naked flame in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author- ised specialist workshop. Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop. The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car- ried out. In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme- diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.). Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight. Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes. If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap. Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time. The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar.

72 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system7

7.2 Gas bottles

Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 C, whereas butane gas gasifies at 0 C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter. Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work- shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced. Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside. Do not use the gas bottle compartment as storage space as it is not moisture-proof. Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the compartment. The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible. Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage. Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.

Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment. Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment. Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt. If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top. Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu- lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle. Use your hands only to connect the gas pressure regulator or the gas tube to the gas bottles. Do not use any tools. Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements. Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 C. Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve.

73Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system 7

7.3 Changing gas bottles

Open external gas bottle compartment (see chapter 6). Close the regulator tap (Fig. 81,1) on the gas bottle (Fig. 81,2). Pay atten- tion to the direction of the arrow. Unscrew the gas tube (Fig. 81,3) by hand from the gas bottle. Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle. Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment. Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts. Screw gas tube on gas bottle by hand.

Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles. Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar. Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle valve. The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle down to the operating pressure of the gas devices. For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe the accessories shops have corresponding Euro filling sets and Euro bottle sets. Information available at the dealers or service centre. For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.

When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire. When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

Fig. 81 Gas bottle compartment

74 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system7

7.4 Gas isolator taps

A gas isolator tap (Fig. 82) for every gas device is built into the vehicle. The gas isolator taps are located behind a flap in the kitchen area.

7.5 External gas connection (special equipment)

The external gas connection (Fig. 83) is located at the rear or to the left or right of the vehicle depending on the model.

Fig. 82 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

1 Cooker 2 Boiler (special equipment) 3 Oven (special equipment) 4 Refrigerator 5 Heater

If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator tap. Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the external gas connection. Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an opera- tion pressure of 30 mbar. Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap, make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air. Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised spe- cialist workshop. When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark. Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the information stickers on the external gas connection.

Fig. 83 External gas connection, gas isolator tap closed

75Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system 7

Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 83,1). Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 83,2).

7.6 DuoControl switching facility (special equipment)

The DuoControl is an automatic switching facility with a remote display for a two-bottle gas system. The DuoControl switching facility automatically switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still continue operation. The DuoControl switching facility is suitable for all commercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg.

Construction of the unit The DuoControl switching facility consists of a reversing valve (Fig. 84,3) and an operating unit (Fig. 85). The reversing valve is installed between the gas tubes (Fig. 84,2 and 5). The knob (Fig. 84,4) on the reversing valve is used to select which of the gas bottles is to be used as a primary bottle and which is to be used as a reserve bottle. The reversing valve is equipped with the regulator defroster Eis-Ex. This pre- vents damage to the gas system during the winter months. Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 85). The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 84,1 and 6) must be opened man- ually. The reversing valve provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas bottle is being drawn upon. The two indicator lamps on the operating unit indi- cate the level of the primary bottle. When the green indicator lamp (Fig. 85,6) illuminates, the primary bottle is full. When the red indicator lamp (Fig. 85,5) illuminates, the primary bottle is empty. In this case, the reserve bottle is used for the gas supply.

Operating modes The DuoControl switching facility has two operating modes:

Winter operation "On and heating" Summer operation "On"

Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 84 DuoControl switching facility Fig. 85 Operating unit

76 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system7

Putting into operation: Open the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 84,1 and 6). Use the knob (Fig. 84,4) on the reversing valve (Fig. 84,3) to select the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle). Always turn the knob as far as it will go. Switch on the DuoControl switching facility at the operating unit (Fig. 85). To do so, set the rocker switch (Fig. 85,7) to winter operation "On and heating" (Fig. 85,2) or to summer operation "On" (Fig. 85,4). The reversing valve is now deaerated. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 85,1) illuminates if the winter operation has been selected and the regulator defroster is acti- vated.

Switching off: Set the rocker switch (Fig. 85,7) to " " (Fig. 85,3). The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 85,1) goes out. Close the regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 84,1 and 6).

Remote display The indicator lamps on the operating unit (Fig. 85,5 and 6) indicate in the vehicle interior whether the primary bottle is ready for operation.

Changing gas bottles If the green indicator lamp (Fig. 85,6) stops illuminating during operation and the red indicator lamp (Fig. 85,5) illuminates, the gas bottle selected as pri- mary bottle is empty and needs to be changed. The reserve bottle continues supplying the gas appliances with gas.

Changing gas bottles: Close the regulator tap on the empty gas bottle. Unscrew the gas tube of the gas bottle. Connect the full gas bottle to the gas tube. Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Set the knob on the reversing valve with a half-turn, so that the newly replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.

7.7 Gas alarm system (special equipment)

The gas alarm system has two functions:

Alarm in the case of an attack with narcotic gas Alarm if there is a leak in the gas system

The gas alarm system is ready for operation as soon as the 12 V power supply is supplied with power.

When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.

If the gas sensor or a cable is defective, the buzzer sounds until the defect has been rectified. If a deodorant spray, hairspray or a powerful cleaning agent is used in the immediate vicinity of the gas sensor, a false alarm may be triggered. Extended time in a tunnel (traffic jam) may also trigger a false alarm. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

77Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system 7

The flashing LED (Fig. 86,2) next to the terminal block of the gas sensor (Fig. 86,1) indicates readiness for operation.

Switching off the buzzer: Briefly switch off the 12 V power supply and switch it on again (e.g. on the safety cut-out in the power pack).

Fig. 86 Gas sensor

78 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Gas system7

79Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

8Electrical systemChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

safety explanations of terms relating to the battery 12 V power supply power supply unit battery main switch electric kit 230 V power supply connection to the 230 V power supply fuse rating towing vehicle connection external socket electrical wiring

The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in chapter 9.

8.1 General safety instructions

The vehicle is a safe place during a storm (Faraday cage). However, to protect the electrical devices, disconnect the 230 V connection and retract the antennae as a precaution.

8.2 Terms

Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery. The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). The so-called K20 value is normally used. The K20 value indicates how much current a battery is able to dispense over a time period of 20 hours without causing damage, or how much current is required to charge a flat battery within 20 hours. For example, if a battery can dispense 4 amps for 20 hours, then it has a capacity of 4 A x 20 h = 80 Ah. If more current flows, the capacity of the battery reduces proportionately. External influences, such as temperature and age may alter the storage capacity of the battery. Capacity details refer to new batteries operating at room temperature.

8.3 12 V power supply

Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.

If you use the battery of the towing vehicle to provide power for the caravan, bear in mind that the battery capacity is restricted. If you place too great a burden on the battery, this may lead to starting difficulties. Always disconnect the electrical connection between the towing vehicle and the caravan before the caravan is connected to the local power supply. In order to carry this out, disconnect the plug from towing vehicle socket.

80 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

When the caravan is not connected to the 230 V power supply, 12 V power supply is performed either by the starter battery of the connected towing vehicle or by the living area battery (electric kit). The starter battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, the elec- trical appliances should not be operated for a long time without using the 230 V power supply when the engine of the towing vehicle is switched off. If the caravan is electrically connected to the towing vehicle and the vehicle engine is running, the living area battery is charged by the vehicle generator (electric kit).

8.4 Power supply unit CSV 400-1

Functions The power supply unit distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and secures them. If the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V supply, the requisite power supply is provided by the battery of the towing vehicle, as long as contact 9 "constant positive" is connected to the towing vehicle socket (see connection diagram at the end of this chapter). The 12 V living area lamps and the 12 V plug sockets can be used, with the exception of the TV output plug socket. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets. If the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, the power supply unit switches the power supply in the living area automatically from the towing vehicle battery to mains operation. The internal power pack in the power supply unit provides 12 V plug sockets and 12 V appliances with power.

Position The power supply unit (Fig. 87) is installed in the wardrobe.

Do not cover the ventilation slots on the power supply unit. Danger of over- heating.

Fig. 87 Power supply unit CSV 400-1

1 Connections: Consumer circuits 3 and 5 (awning light, TV), water pump

2 Fuses (see table in section 8.8) 3 Connections: Consumer circuits 1

and 2, refrigerator control 4 Connection: 12 V indicator (optional) 5 Connections: Towing vehicle con-

necting cable, refrigerator load circuit

The power supply unit is not used to charge the starter battery of the towing vehicle.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

81Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

8.5 Battery main switch (Belcanto Nordic models)

To completely isolate the 12 V power supply, turn off the battery main switch (Fig. 88,1).

Switching off: Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 88,2) by a quarter turn anticlockwise to the "OFF" position. The 12 V living area power supply is switched off.

Switching on: Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 89,1) by a quarter turn clockwise to the "ON" position. The 12 V living area power supply is switched on.

8.6 Electric kit (special equipment)

Scope The following components belong to the electric kit:

Battery 12 V, 90 or 110 Ah Power supply unit Panel

8.6.1 Living area battery

Fig. 88 Battery main switch, "OFF" position

Fig. 89 Battery main switch, "ON" posi- tion

The living area battery may not be opened. Use only the built-in power supply unit to load the living area battery. Prior to commencing a journey ensure the living area battery is fully charged. For this reason charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours before commencing the journey. During the trip, use every opportunity to charge the living area battery. Charge the living area battery for at least 20 hours after the journey. Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up. For long periods of inactivity (4 weeks or more), either disconnect the living area battery or recharge it regularly. When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type. Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the living area battery, switch off the engine of the towing vehicle as well as the 230 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit! If the living area battery is disconnected and the caravan and towing vehicle are connected electrically, do not apply the ignition. There is a danger of short circuit from exposed cable ends.

82 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

When the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply or the 230 V power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be operated for a long time without using the 230 V power supply.

Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some electrical appliances continuously require.

Low temperatures outside reduce the capacity available. The self-discharge rate of the battery is also dependant on temperature. At 20 to 25 C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 C the self-dis- charge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month. An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available. The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of the living area battery is consumed. In order to prevent fast discharge of the living area battery, the refrigerator is operated on 12 V power supply only when the engine is running and when there is an electrical connection between the towing vehicle and caravan.

Charging Only use the power supply unit to charge the living area battery. Therefore, connect the vehicle to a 230 V power supply system as often as possible.

The living area battery is recharged by the alternator of the towing vehicle if the caravan is connected electrically to the towing vehicle and the towing vehicle's engine is running.

Changing the battery

The battery is maintenance-free. Maintenance-free means: It is not necessary to check the acid level. It is not necessary to lubricate the battery poles. It is not necessary to refill the distilled water. Even a maintenance-free battery must be charged regularly.

Total discharge damages the battery. Recharge battery in good time.

Charge the battery for at least 48 hours after a total discharge. At temperatures below 0 C, a living area battery consumes less power. At approx. -15 C, there will be no more power. The living area battery can no longer be charged.

Further information can be obtained in the separate documentation for the living area battery.

The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the skin or the eyes is to be avoided. In the event of contact with the skin or eyes, rinse immediately with clear water. Keep naked flames and possible sources of sparks away from the bat- tery. Danger of explosion!

83Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

Changing the battery: Release negative (-) terminal clamp. Release positive (+) terminal clamp. Remove the battery. Put in a new battery. Connect the new battery in the reverse order.

8.6.2 Power supply unit CSV 409

Functions The power supply unit performs the following tasks:

The power supply units charges the living area battery. The power supply unit distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and secures them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets. The power supply unit provides connections for a solar charge regulator as well as other control and monitoring functions. The power supply unit separates the starter battery of the towing vehicle electrically from the living area battery of the caravan if there is an electric connection between the towing vehicle and the caravan and if the vehicle engine and the ignition are turned off. In this way the 12 V appliances of the caravan cannot discharge the starter battery of the towing vehicle.

The power supply unit only works in conjunction with a panel. The power in the power supply unit (> 28 A) is divided into charging current and current to the appliances. The charging current is always just the portion that is not being used by any appliances. If the current to the appliances exceeds the current available, then the living area battery is discharged.

Position The power supply unit is installed in the wardrobe or in a storage compart- ment.

When replacing the battery, only use the same type of battery (same capacity and voltage, cycle stability).

Do not cover the ventilation slots on the power supply unit. Danger of over- heating.

Fig. 90 Power supply unit CSV 409

1 Connections: Consumer circuit 3 and 5 (awning light, TV), water pump

2 Fuses (see table in section 8.8) 3 Connections: Consumer circuits 1

and 2, refrigerator control 4 Connections: Solar charge regulator,

panel 5 Connection: Living area battery 6 Connections: Towing vehicle, refrig-

erator load circuit

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

84 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

Battery selector switch

Charging the battery During mobile operation, the alternator of the towing vehicle charges the living area battery. If the engine and the ignition of the towing vehicle are cut off, then the power supply unit disconnects the starter battery electrically from the living area battery so that it is not possible to discharge the starter battery of the towing vehicle by using 12 V living area appliances. When the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, the living area bat- tery is charged by the power supply unit.

8.6.3 Panel LT 408

230 V indicator lamp The yellow 230 V indicator lamp (Fig. 91,1) is on whenever line voltage is available at the power supply unit input.

Display V for battery voltage

The LEDs for display V (Fig. 91,2) indicate the battery voltage of the living area battery.

Displays: Press the button (Fig. 91,3) at the top or bottom:The battery voltage of the living area battery is displayed.

The tables below will help you correctly interpret the displayed battery voltage of the living area battery.

If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!

Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat- tery. The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.

The power supply unit is not used to charge the starter battery of the towing vehicle.

Fig. 91 Panel LT 408

1 230 V indicator lamp 2 Display V 3 Button for reading the battery voltage

of the living area battery 4 Indicator lamp for water pump 5 Indicator lamp for the 12 V power

supply for the living area 6 12 V main switch 7 Rocker switch for water pump

85Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

12 V main switch The 12 V main switch (Fig. 91,6) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply of the living area on and off.

Switching on: Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 91,6): The 12 V living area power supply is switched on. Indicator lamp (Fig. 91,5) lights up yellow.

Switching off: Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 91,6): The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 91,5) goes out.

12 V indicator lamp The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 91,5) lights up yellow whenever the 12 V main switch (Fig. 91,6) is switched on.

Battery volt- age (values during operation)

Mobile operation (vehicle moving, no 230 V connec- tion)

Battery operation (vehicle station- ary, no 230 V connection)

Power operation (vehicle station- ary, 230 V con- nection)

Less than 11 V Danger of total discharge

No charging via the alternator

If appliances are switched off: Bat- tery flat

No charging by the CSV

12 V power supply overload

If appliances are switched on: Bat- tery overload

12 V power supply overload

11.5 V to 13 V No charging via the alternator 1)

1) If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.

Normal range No charging by the CSV 1)

12 V power supply overload 1)

12 V power supply overload 1)

13.5 V or more Battery being charged

Occurs only briefly after charging

Battery being charged

Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery

Less than 12 V Discharge or totally discharge

12.2 V 25 %

12.5 V 50 %

More than 12.7 V 100 %

Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.

Measure the off-load voltage preferably several hours after the previous charging (e.g. in the morning) and not directly after a current drain.

When leaving the vehicle, switch off the main 12 V power supply at the panel. This prevents any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery. The refrigerator control takes power from the battery capacity, even if the 12 V main switch is switched off. Therefore disconnect the living area bat- tery from the 12 V power supply, if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

86 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

Switch for water pump The button for the water pump (Fig. 91,7) switches the water supply on and off.

Switching on: Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 91,7): The water supply is ON. Indicator lamp (Fig. 91,4) lights up yellow.

Switching off: Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 91,7): The water supply is OFF.

Indicator lamp for water pump

The indicator lamp (Fig. 91,4) lights up yellow whenever the switch for the water pump (Fig. 91,7) is switched on.

8.6.4 Connection diagrams

Power supply unit CSV 409

If the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply and the water pump is not used for a longer period of time: Switch off the power supply for the water pump. The pump relay uses around 4 Ah current each day.

Fig. 92 Connection diagram

87Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connections: Towing vehicle, refrigerator load circuit + Caravan coupling 12 V switched Caravan coupling switched to 12 V + Caravan coupling 12 V steady plus Caravan coupling to 12 V steady plus + Refrigerator cartridge, fuse in vehicle Refrigerator cartridge, fuse in vehicle + Refrigerator control Refrigerator control

B Molex Minifit SR-F

C Living area battery

D Pin header MSFQ/0 6Fh

E 1 2 3 4 5 6

Connections panel 12 V Off white 12 V On green 12 V control Mains check 12 V brown + 12 V brown

F Pump

G Pump switch 1

H Pump switch 2

I Circuit 1

J Circuit 2

K Circuit 3

L 1 2 3 4 5 6

Circuit 5 + Awning light Awning light + TV TV + Spare Spare

M Connector LF-PA 401 6.3x0.8 - 32-pin

N Solar charge regulator LRS 1214

O MNL-connector socket-3F

P Changeover switch "Blei-Sure/Blei-Gel" (lead-acid/dryfill)

Q Connector cable 6.3x0.8 3 G 1.5 L = 1.2 m 230 V 50 Hz

88 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

Panel

8.7 230 V power supply

The 230 V power supply provides electricity for:

sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A refrigerator power pack or power supply unit

The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area are supplied with voltage by the power pack, power supply unit or living area battery (if available). Connect the vehicle to an external 230 V power supply system as often as possible. If a living area battery is installed, this is automatically charged via a charger module.

Fig. 93 Connection diagram

A Flat plug 6.3 mm Switched supply voltage to water pump

B Flat plug 6.3 mm Voltage supply for water pump - inlet

C MSFWQ/0 6-pin

D Printed circuit board

E 1 2 3 4 5 6

Connections battery charger 12 V Off white 12 V On green 12 V control Mains check 12 V brown + 12 V brown

Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system.

89Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

8.7.1 230 V connection Requirements concerning

the 230 V connection The connection cable, the plug connectors at the point of supply and the plug connector to the vehicle must comply with IEC 60309. The standard designation for the plug connectors is "CEE blue". Use H07RN-F rubber sheathed cable with a minimum cable cross-section of 2.5 mm and a maximum length of 25 m. Earth contact connectors (safety) are not permitted. The interconnection of CEE/safety adapters is also prohibited.

8.7.2 Connecting 230 V power supply

The vehicle can be connected to an external 230 V power supply.

Connecting the vehicle: Check whether the power supply device is suitable regarding connection, voltage, frequency and current. Check whether the cables and connections are suitable. Check the plug connectors and cables for visible damage. Switch off the safety cut-out (Fig. 94,1 and 2) in the fuse box (Fig. 94,3). Open the cover of the 230 V connection on the vehicle (Fig. 95) and insert the plug connector. Ensure that the detent of the spring-mounted pivoting cover is engaged in position.

The external 230 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault current protection switch (FI-switch, 30 mA). To prevent overheating, the cable must be fully uncoiled from the cable reel. In case of doubt or if the 230 V supply is not available or is faulty, contact the operator of the power supply device.

Always disconnect the electrical connection between the towing vehicle and the caravan before the caravan is connected to the local power supply. In order to carry this out, disconnect the plug from towing vehicle socket.

The 230 V connection in the vehicle is equipped with a fault current protec- tion switch (FI-switch). For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.

Fig. 94 230 V fuse box with safety cut- out and FI-switch

Fig. 95 230 V connection on vehicle

90 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

Plug the connector of the connecting cable into the socket of the power supply device. Ensure that the detent of the spring-mounted pivoting cover is engaged in position. Switch on the safety cut-out in the fuse box.

Checking the fault current protection switch:

When the vehicle is connected to the 230 V supply, press the check button (Fig. 94,5) of the fault current protection switch (FI switch) (Fig. 94,4) in the fuse box (Fig. 94,3). The fault current protection switch must trip. Switch the fault current protection switch back on again.

Unplugging the connection: Switch off the safety cut-out (Fig. 94,1 and 2) in the fuse box (Fig. 94,3). Loosen the detent on the power supply device and unplug the connection cable from the socket. Loosen the detent on the vehicle, unplug the plug connector and close the cover of the 230 V connection.

8.8 Fuses

8.8.1 12 V fuses The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are fused individually. The fuses are accessible at the power supply unit or in a separate fuse holder close to the power supply unit.

An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element (Fig. 96,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 96,2), change the fuse. Before changing fuses, take the function, value and colour of the relevant fuses from the following specifications. When changing fuses, only use flat fuses with the values shown below.

Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied. Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off. Never bridge or repair fuses. Only replace faulty fuses with a new fuse with the same rating.

Fig. 96 12 V fuse

1 Unbroken fuse element 2 Broken fuse element

Function Value/colour

Fuses on the power supply unit CSV 400-1

Circuit 1 15 A blue

Circuit 2 15 A blue

Circuit 3 15 A blue

91Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

Fuse for the refrigerator The fuse is located in a fuse holder in the vicinity of the power supply unit unit.

Type of fuse: Flat fuse 15 A/blue

Changing: Remove cover on the floor of the wardrobe. Replace fuse. Reattach cover once fuse has been replaced.

Fuse for the Thetford toilet (swivel toilet)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

Changing: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Pull out the Thetford cassette completely. Replace fuse (Fig. 97,1).

Water pump 5 A light brown

Circuit 5 (TV, awning light) 7.5 A brown

Refrigerator control 2 A grey

Fuses on the power supply unit CSV 409

(Electric kit)

Circuit 5 (TV, awning light) 7.5 A brown

Circuit 3 15 A blue

Water pump 5 A light brown

Internal charger 30 A yellow

Circuit 1 15 A blue

Circuit 2 15 A blue

Refrigerator control 2 A grey

Solar 15 A blue

Function Value/colour

Fig. 97 Fuse for the Thetford toilet

1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple

92 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

Fuse for the Thetford toilet (fixed seat)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

Changing: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Remove the Thetford cassette and swing out the flap in the housing panel. Replace fuse (Fig. 98,1).

8.8.2 230 V fuse

A fault current protection switch (FI-switch) (Fig. 99,4) in the fuse box (Fig. 99,3) protects the complete vehicle from fault current (0.03 A). The downstream safety cut-out (10 A) (Fig. 99,2) secures the 230 V sockets, the power supply unit, the auxiliary charging unit and the refrigerator. For vehicles with special equipment, e.g. air conditioning unit, an additional safety cut-out (16 A) (Fig. 99,1) secures the device.

Position The fuse box is installed close to the 230 V connection.

Checking fault current protection switch:

When the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, press the test button (Fig. 99,5). The fault current protection switch (RCD) must be acti- vated.

Fig. 98 Fuse for the Thetford toilet

1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple

Check the fault current protection switch for each connection to the 230 V power supply, at least once every 6 months.

Fig. 99 230 V fuse box with safety cut- out and FI-switch

93Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

8.9 Thirteen-pin plug connection diagram Note the colours of the connecting cable of the socket which is fitted to the towing vehicle. This makes any new connection which may be necessary easier. To connect the thirteen-pin plug to a seven-pin socket, use a commercially available adaptor.

Fig. 100 Contact diagram of the thirteen-pin plug

Con- tact no.

DIN- specifi- cation

Function Cable colour caravan

Cable colour plug

Cross section of the wire

Connection diagram 1 L Left direction indicator Yellow Yellow 1.5 mm2

2 54 G Fog tail light Blue Grey 1.5 mm2

3 1) 31 Earth (contacts 1, 2, 4 - 8)

White White 2.5 mm2

4 R Right direction indica- tor

Green Green 1.5 mm2

5 58 R Right tail light, side marker light (white/ red), clearance light, li- cence plate light

Brown Brown 1.5 mm2

6 54 Brake lights Red Red 1.5 mm2

7 58 L Left tail light, side marker light (white/ red), clearance light, li- cence plate light

Black Black 1.5 mm2

8 Back-up light Grey Purple 1.5 mm2

9 Constant positive Blue (ca- ble no. 78)

Blue 2.5 mm2

10 Positive charging line Orange 2.5 mm2

11 Earth charging line Orange- white

2.5 mm2

12 Not assigned

94 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

8.10 External socket (special equipment)

The 230 V socket and the 12 V socket can be used to power electrical devices in the awning.

Connection possibilities TV socket and SAT socket offer various possibilities for TV operation:

TV inside the vehicle (Fig. 102,4): Connection to roof antenna (Fig. 102,1) with connection cable (Fig. 102,2) TV inside the vehicle (Fig. 102,4): Connection to external antenna (Fig. 102,3) TV inside the awning (Fig. 103,4): Connection to roof antenna (Fig. 103,1) with connection cable (Fig. 103,2) TV inside the awning (Fig. 103,4): Connection to external antenna (Fig. 103,3)

13 1) Earth (contacts 9 - 12) Brown (cable no. 78)

Blue- white

2.5 mm2

1) These earth cables may not be connected to electrical conductors on the trailer side.

Fig. 101 External socket

1 TV socket 2 12 V socket 3 SAT socket 4 230 V socket

Con- tact no.

DIN- specifi- cation

Function Cable colour caravan

Cable colour plug

Cross section of the wire

Fig. 102 TV inside the vehicle Fig. 103 TV in the awning

95Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system 8

8.11 Circuit diagrams 8.11.1 Circuit diagram, interior

Fig. 104 Circuit diagram, interior

1 Towing vehicle connecting cable (external fuse max. 15 A) 2 Refrigerator 3 12 V indicator (panel) 4 Refrigerator control 5 Water pump 6 Circuit 1 7 Circuit 2 8 Circuit 3 9 TV

10 Awning light 11 Spare 12 Circuit 5

96 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Electrical system8

8.11.2 Circuit diagram, exterior Cable installation can differ depending on the model.

Fig. 105 Circuit diagram, exterior

1 Side marking light (number depends on type) 2 Left direction indicator (yellow) 3 Fog tail light (blue) 4 Earth 1 - 8 (white) 5 Right direction indicator (green) 6 Brake lights (red) 7 Right tail light (brown) 8 Right side marking lamps (brown) 9 Left tail light (black)

10 Left side marking lamps (black) 11 Constant positive (blue) 12 Earth 9 - 12 (brown) 13 Wiring harness, bumper (dependent on type)

97Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

9AppliancesChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle. The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances. Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction man- uals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

heater air conditioning unit boiler gas cooker gas oven microwave oven extractor hood refrigerator

9.1 General

The heater, boiler, cooker and refrigerator are fitted depending on the model of the vehicle. In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the appliances and their particular features. To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.

The heat exchanger of the Truma hot-air heater has to be replaced after 30 years. The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be replaced after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an author- ised specialist workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The operator of the heater must see to it that the parts are replaced. For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must cor- respond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufac- turer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.

Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the respective appliance.

Fig. 106 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

1 Cooker 2 Boiler (special equipment) 3 Oven (special equipment) 4 Refrigerator 5 Heater

98 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

9.2 Heater

When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will disappear by themselves after a while.

9.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle

9.2.2 To heat properly

Hot air distribution Several air outlet nozzles (Fig. 107) are built into the vehicle. Pipes conduct the warm air to the air outlet nozzles. Turn the air outlet nozzles in a suitable position so the air can escape as required.

Adjusting the air outlet nozzles

Fully open: Full hot air stream Half or partially open: Reduced hot air stream

In winter, check that the waste gas vent on the vehicle roof is free of snow and ice before using the heater. Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. Never run the heater in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Never operate the heater in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! If the circulation fan does not activate automatically, switch the circula- tion fan on from heating level 3 to 4. There is danger of overheating for the heater! Do not damage the exhaust gas pipe. The waste gas vent may neither be closed nor blocked. When camping in winter, the Truma waste gas vent extension should be used to prevent snow from choking the waste gas vent. Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.

If the awning is put up and the heater is running in gas operation, exhaust gases from the heater can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffocation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.

Fig. 107 Air outlet nozzle

99Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

When five air outlet nozzles are completely opened, less warm air escapes through each nozzle. However, if only three air outlet nozzles are opened, more warm air flows out of each nozzle.

9.2.3 Hot-air heater

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater". Turn control knob on the heater to the required position and press it firmly. The automatic ignition produces ignition sparks. A clicking noise can be heard. Keep the control knob pressed until the flame burns. The burning of the flame can be checked in the inspection window in the heater cover. Hold the control knob down for a further 10 seconds, until the ignition fuse starts up.

Switching off: Turn the control knob on the heater to "0". The automatic ignition is switched off simultaneously. Close the gas isolator tap "Heater" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

In case of problems wait for two minutes before trying again.

Fig. 108 Heater control knob

The automatic ignition sparks until the gas ignites. If there is no gas, it will continue to spark until the battery in the automatic ignition is empty. When the heater is not required, set the control knob to "0" to avoid the battery in the automatic ignition running flat. If the clicking noise cannot be heard at all or only in intervals of several sec- onds during ignition: Change the battery in the automatic ignition. Insert a new batteries before the start of every heating season.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

100 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

Changing the battery on the automatic ignition:

Make certain that the heater is switched off. Remove heater cover (Fig. 109,2). Pull the heater cover upwards and for- wards, press up the retaining springs (Fig. 109,1) to the side and tip the cover forwards. Turn the cover (Fig. 110,1) to the side, so that the connecting cables for the hot-air fan as well as the ignition control lamp do not need to be discon- nected. Push battery chamber cover on the automatic ignition (Fig. 110,2) upward. Remove the old battery out of the battery chamber of the automatic ignition. Insert a new battery (Fig. 110,3) of the same type, correctly aligned (+/-), into the battery chamber of the automatic ignition. Only use temperature resistant (+70 C) and leak-proof Mignon batteries. Push battery chamber cover on the automatic ignition upward. Press the stop lever to the right, until the lock engages audibly.

Mount the heater cover. To do this, place the cover (Fig. 111,1) on the lower retaining clips (Fig. 111,2). Insert the operating rod from underneath into the grip socket and allow the cover to catch in place above.

Fig. 109 Removing heater cover Fig. 110 Heater opened

Fig. 111 Heater cover, retaining clips

101Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

9.2.4 Circulation fan The circulation fan together with the hot-air heater ensures a better distribution of hot air throughout the caravan.

Switching circulation fan on: Set sliding switch (Fig. 112,1) to " " (manual control) or "A" (automatic operation). Turn the knob (Fig. 112,2) to set (manual control) or limit (automatic oper- ation) the power of the circulation fan.

Switching circulation fan off: Set sliding switch (Fig. 112,1) to " " (off).

9.2.5 Airmix comfort package (special equipment) The air circulation fan can be installed on the floor or on the wall with the Airmix comfort package. This guarantees a particularly quiet running, since no noise transferring connection is made to the fitted cover of the heater.

Fresh outside air is guided into the caravan by the Airmix. Advantages of out- side air are:

Cooling effect in the summer Drying effect in the winter

The outside air can be mixed progressively with the inside air that has already been heated by adjusting the operating controls (Fig. 113,1).

Fig. 112 Operating switch for circulation fan

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 113 Airmix comfort package

102 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

9.2.6 Alde hot-water heater

Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:

Display (touch screen) Control buttons

Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:

Display The display (Fig. 114,1) is designed as a touch screen. Touching the symbols calls up the relevant function.

See installation instructions of the separate instruction manual for the Airmix comfort package.

Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in chapter 12. Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.

The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater is in operation. We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera- tion and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 12. When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last settings used. For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 12. For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Fig. 114 Operating unit for hot-water heater

1 Display (touch screen) 2 "Menu" button 3 On/Off button

When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to home position after two minutes. Changes to the settings are saved automatically after 10 seconds.

Pos. in Fig. 114

Button Function

2 MENU Open adjustment menu

3 Activate heating

103Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

Start screen The Start screen appears on the display after the heater is switched on. The Start screen contains the following information:

Adjustment menu The "MENU" button calls up the adjustment menu. The meanings of the indi- vidual symbols are described in the following table. The values can be increased or reduced via the "+" or "-" symbols.

Tool menus The various heater functions can be called up and adjusted via the tool menus. The arrow symbols are used to change between the menus. The meanings of the individual symbols are described in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Selecting the operating mode

The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:

Gas operation 230 V electrical operation Gas and 230 V electrical operation

The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.

Selecting gas operation: Press the "On" button next to the " " symbol. The gas operation is acti- vated.

Selecting 230 V electrical operation:

Press the "+" button next to the " " symbol until the desired heat output is reached.

Selecting gas and 230 V electrical operation:

Select gas operation and 230 V electrical operation on the operating unit.

Symbol Signification

This symbol appears when the circulating pump is activated

This symbol appears when a switching facility for gas cylinders is activated

This symbol appears when a voltage of 230 V is present at the heater

The internal temperature is displayed next to this symbol

The external temperature is displayed next to this symbol if an external sensor is fitted

Symbol Signification

Set the desired temperature of +5 C to +30 C

Set the water temperature in the boiler

Set the heat output in electrical operation

Activate the function "Heating in gas operation"

Call up the enabling menu for the tool menus

Select the output level during 230 V electrical operation in such a way that it corresponds to the 230 V connection protection: Level 1 (1050 W) at 6 A Level 2 (2100 W) at 10 A Level 3 (3150 W) at 16 A

104 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.

Switching on the heater: Press " " button. The Start screen appears in the display. The heater starts automatically.

Switching the heater off: Press " " button. The heater is turned off.

9.2.7 Ultraheat additional electric heater (special equipment) The Ultraheat additional electric heater is built-in to the hot-air heater. There- fore there are three heating options:

Only the hot-air heater Hot-air heater and electric heater Only the electric heater

The vehicle can be heated more quickly with the additional electric heater.

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 230 V power supply (see section 8.7). Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 115,1) to the desired output level (500, 1000 or 2000 W). Turn temperature control knob (Fig. 115,3) to the desired output level.

Switching off: Turn the rotary switch (Fig. 115,1) to " " (Fig. 115,2).

If gas and 230 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is con- nected to the 230 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only operates in 230 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient does the gas operation also automatically switch on. The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap are opened. 230 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply.

The additional electric heater only operates if the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. If the heater is operated by electricity and gas simultaneously, the addi- tional electric heater switches off to prevent possible overheating by the stronger gas burner.

Fig. 115 Operating unit for Ultraheat additional electric heater

1 Rotary switch 2 Off 3 Temperature control knob

105Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

9.2.8 Warming unit for waste water pipes (special equipment)

In order to prevent waste water pipes freezing up, the waste water pipes can be electrically warmed. When the warming unit is turned on, the temperature of the waste water pipes is monitored by temperature sensors. If the temperature falls below 5 C, the heating elements are switched on and the waste water pipes are warmed. If the temperature rises above a certain level, the heating elements are switched off again.

The 230 V AC/12 V DC transformer (Fig. 116,2) is installed in the wardrobe or in the storage area beneath the seating group, depending on the model. The control unit is integrated in the transformer housing. The control lamps have the following meanings:

The indicator lamp (Fig. 116,5) lights up in green: Regulation in operation The indicator lamps (Fig. 116,4 and 6) light up in red: Waste water pipes are warmed

A test button (Fig. 116,3) is integrated in the housing with which the control unit can be operated for a short time. By pressing the test button, the function of the warming unit can be tested, even if the ambient temperature is above 5 C.

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to a 230 V power supply (see section 8.7.1). Turn switch (Fig. 116,1) on the transformer (Fig. 116,2) to "ON".

Switching off: Turn switch (Fig. 116,1) on the transformer (Fig. 116,2) to "OFF".

9.2.9 Electrical floor warming unit (special equipment)

Always only press the test button briefly.

The warming unit only functions when the vehicle is connected to a 230 V power supply.

Fig. 116 Transformer with control unit

On models with electrical floor warming unit, never drill holes in the floor or screw in any screws. Careful with sharp objects. There is danger of a power cut or a short circuit due to damage to a heater wire.

106 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

The transformer (Fig. 117,1) for the electrical floor warming unit is installed either in the bench seat or in the bedding box, depending on the model.

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 230 V power supply (see chapter 8). Press the rocker switch (Fig. 118,2). The indicator lamp (Fig. 118,1) on the switch is illuminated.

Switching off: Press the rocker switch (Fig. 118,2). The indicator lamp (Fig. 118,1) on the switch goes off.

Switching on: Press upper part of the flip switch (Fig. 119,1).

Switching off: Press lower part of the flip switch (Fig. 119,1).

After switching off, the floor remains warm for a while, due to residual heat. If the transformer is overloaded, the overload protection is actuated. The pin (Fig. 117,2) jumps out.

Do not cover the transformer. Danger of overheating!

The electrical floor warming unit only operates if the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. The output of the electrical floor warming unit alone is not sufficient to heat the living area.

Fig. 117 Transformer for electrical floor warming unit

Fig. 118 Switch for electrical floor warming unit

Depending on the model, a floor warming unit is fitted in the toilet compart- ment. This floor warming unit is switched on and off separately.

Fig. 119 Switch for floor warming unit in toilet compartment

107Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

Switching on overload protection:

Press the pin (Fig. 117,2) on the overload protection when the transformer is cooled.

9.3 Air conditioning unit (special equipment) 9.3.1 Dometic

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con- trol in the direction of the ceiling unit.

Operating modes The air conditioning unit has the following operating modes:

Automatic Ventilation, manual Cooling, manual Heating, manual

Switching on: Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 120,9). Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 120,11) as often as required until the required mode (Fig. 120,1, 2, 3 or 4) is indicated on the display (Fig. 120,20). Use the "+" (Fig. 120,19) and "" (Fig. 120,18) buttons to set the desired temperature. Use the fan speed button (Fig. 120,10) to select the desired fan level.

Switching off: Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 120,9).

If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.

In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air conditioning unit. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 120 Remote control

1 Symbol for automatic mode 2 Symbol for cold mode 3 Symbol for warm mode 4 Symbol for ventilation mode 5 Symbol for discharged batteries 6 Time 7 Temperature display 8 Fan speed display 9 ON/OFF button

10 Fan speed button 11 "MODE" button 12 "CLOCK" button 13 Reset key 14 Interior temperature display button

"ROOM" 15 Store button "SET" 16 Light button "LIGHT"(optional) 17 Temperature unit change button "F/

C" 18 Temperature decrease button "-" 19 Temperature increase button "+" 20 Display

108 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

LED The LED (Fig. 121,4) on the ceiling unit (Fig. 121,1) displays the operating status of the air conditioning unit:

Air current The air current can be directed in different directions. The distribution of the air current toward the front or back is continuously adjustable.

Adjusting air current: Align the two deflectors (Fig. 121,3 and 5) in the desired position. Rotate knob (Fig. 121,2) on sliding regulator in an anticlockwise direction. The sliding regulator for air distribution is released. Slide the sliding regulator forwards or backwards to the desired position. The side on which the sliding regulator is located is closed. Turn the knob tight in the clockwise direction.

9.3.2 Telair

Fig. 121 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

Status LED Signification

Off Air conditioning unit off

Orange Air conditioning unit ready to operate

Green Air conditioning unit in operation

Red (continuous) No 230 V power connection

Red (flashes once intermit- tently)

Fault in the interior temperature gauge

Red (flashes twice intermit- tently)

Fault in the exterior temperature gauge

Always wait at least 2 minutes between switching off and switching on again. Otherwise the compressor will be damaged. If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.

The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 230 V power supply. In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air conditioning unit. Following switch-on the air conditioning unit needs approx. 3 minutes until the compressor starts to run and cold air or hot air is output. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

109Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con- trol in the direction of the receiver.

Operating modes Automatic Cooling Heater

Switching on: Press the "ON/OFF" button (Fig. 122,7). Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 122,10) as often as required until the required mode (Fig. 122,1, 2 or 3) is indicated on the display. The corre- sponding indicator lamp on the diffusor display (Fig. 123,3) lights up. Use the temperature increase button (Fig. 122,6) or temperature reduction button (Fig. 122,8) to set the required temperature. Use the ventilation speed button (Fig. 122,9) to select the required ventila- tion level.

Switching off: Press the "ON/OFF" button (Fig. 122,7).

9.4 Boiler

Fig. 122 Remote control

1 Symbol for automatic 2 Symbol for cooling 3 Symbol for heater 4 Temperature (set) display 5 Fan speed display 6 Temperature increase button 7 "ON/OFF" button 8 Temperature reduction button 9 Ventilation speed button

10 "Mode" button 11 Display

Fig. 123 Display on the diffusor

1 Mains connection indicator lamp 2 Temperature (current) display 3 Mode indicator lamp

Green: Cooling Red: Heater

If the air conditioning unit has run in heating mode, the blower will run on for some minutes in order to dissipate the heat completely.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. Never run the boiler in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Never operate the boiler in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! The water in the boiler can be heated up to 65 C. Risk of scalding!

110 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

9.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle

9.4.2 Hot water source

The hot water source can either be operated using the 230 V power supply (electrical mode of operation), with the hot air of the heater system or both types of energy. The hot water source heats approx. 5 l water to a temperature of approx. 65 C. The electrical mode of operation is activated using the operating switch (Fig. 124). The indicator lamp (Fig. 124,1) on the switch must illuminate. During hot air operation, the water in the hot water source is heated up by the heater and the circulating air.

Switch on the boiler and empty it if the vehicle is not used. Never use boiler when empty. If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost. Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the build-up of limescale.

Do not use the water from the boiler as drinking water.

If the awning is put up and the boiler is running in gas operation, exhaust gases from the boiler can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffo- cation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.

Do not fit a check valve in the cold water pipe between the hot water source and the water pump. Use a pressure reducer when connecting to a central water supply or with strong pumps. The hot water source is designed only for pressures of up to 1.2 bar. In addition, insert a safety/drainage valve in to the cold water pipe.

Do not use the water from the hot water source as drinking water.

Fig. 124 Operating switch for hot water source

111Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with one or two hot water source drain cocks.

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the external 230 V power supply and switch on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker. Switch on the operating switch (Fig. 124). Indicator lamp (Fig. 124,1) on the switch is illuminated. The water in the hot water source is heated up to 65 C.

Switching off: Switch off the operating switch (Fig. 124). Indicator lamp (Fig. 124,1) on the switch goes off.

Filling the hot water source with water:

Connect the vehicle to the external 230 V power supply and switch on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker. Switch off the operating switch (Fig. 124). Indicator lamp (Fig. 124,1) in the switch is not on. Close all drain cocks. To do this, close the caps (Fig. 125,1) by turning them in a clockwise direction. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the hot water source is full of water. Close all water taps.

Emptying the hot water source:

Switch off the 230 V power supply on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker. Open the stopper of the water tank. Open all water taps and set to the central position. Hang the shower handset up in the shower position. Hold the water pump up until the water pipes are completely empty. Open all drain cocks of the hot water source. To do this turn the caps (Fig. 125,1) in an anticlockwise direction. Check whether the water is completely drained from the hot water source.

Fig. 125 Drain cock for hot water source

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

112 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

9.4.3 Truma boiler (special equipment)

Operating modes The boiler has three operating modes:

Gas operation 230 V electrical operation Combined operation

The operating mode is set with the operating controls. The regulation of the water temperature in the boiler is only possible with gas operation.

Gas operation The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.

Switching on: Remove cap from waste gas vent. Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Boiler".

Set the rotary switch (Fig. 126,3) to " " (Fig. 126,5). The green "Opera- tion" indicator lamp illuminates the knob (Fig. 126,1). Adjust the knob (Fig. 126,1) to the required water temperature.

The red indicator lamp (Fig. 126,2) illuminates when there is a fault (see chapter 14).

Switching off: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 126,3) on the operating unit (Fig. 126) to " " (Fig. 126,4). Close the gas isolator tap "Boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Place cap on waste gas vent.

The red indicator lamp (Fig. 126,2) illuminates when there is a fault (see chapter 14).

230 V electrical operation The boiler is operated exclusively with electricity.

Remove cap from waste gas vent before using the Truma boiler.

Fig. 126 Operating unit for Truma boiler (gas operation)

1 Temperature control knob 2 Red indicator lamp "Fault" 3 Rotary switch 4 Off 5 On

230 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply.

113Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the external 230 V power supply and switch on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker. Set flip switch (Fig. 127,1) to on. The indicator lamp on the switch is illumi- nated. The water in the boiler is heated up to 65 C.

Switching off: Set the flip switch (Fig. 127,1) to " ". The indicator lamp on the switch goes off.

Combined operation The water is heated more quickly in the boiler if gas operation and 230 V elec- trical operation are switched on simultaneously.

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank. Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with one or several boiler drain cocks. The drain cocks can have different designs (rocking lever or twist cap).

Filling the boiler with water: Close all boiler drain cocks. To do this, position the rocking lever (Fig. 128,1) horizontally or turn the cap (Fig. 128,2) in a clockwise direc- tion. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Close all water taps.

Fig. 127 Flip switch for Truma boiler (230 V electrical operation)

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 128 Drain cocks

114 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

Emptying the boiler: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 126,3) on the operating unit (Fig. 126) to " " (Fig. 126,4) or the flip switch (Fig. 127,1) to " ". Turn knob (Fig. 126,1) anticlockwise until it can go no further. Open all boiler drain cocks. To do this, position the rocking lever (Fig. 128,1) vertically or turn the cap (Fig. 128,2) in an anticlockwise direc- tion. Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 12.5 litres).

9.4.4 Alde boiler (partially special equipment)

Switching the boiler on/ off

The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 9.2.6.

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: Close the drain cock(s). Position the rocking lever (Fig. 129,1) horizontally. Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Close all water taps.

Emptying the boiler: Switch off boiler. Open all water taps and set to the central position. Open drain cock(s) (Fig. 129). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 129,1) in a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside. Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 10 litres).

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with one or two drain cocks.

Fig. 129 Drain cock

For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 12.

115Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

9.5 Cooker

9.5.1 Gas cooker

The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight. Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating. Do not fit any curtains in the immediate proximity of the cooker. Fire hazard! Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han- dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.

During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be near the gas cooker. Fire hazard! The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be cov- ered by cooking pans placed on the cooker. If there is a flame protection, always put it up when using the gas cooker. Depending on the model, the gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring. When closing there is danger of getting injured!

Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob. Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation. Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed. Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid. Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Oth- erwise the glass plate could shatter.

Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker burners. When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply. Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

116 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker". Open the gas cooker lid. Depending on the model, fold out or set up the flame protection. Turn the control knob (Fig. 130,1) on the burner you wish to use to the igni- tion position (large flame). Press the control knob down and hold it. Light the burner with a gas lighter, a match or other suitable means of lighting. Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open. Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting. If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.

Switching off: Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades. Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

9.5.2 Gas oven (Dometic) (special equipment)

Fig. 130 Operating controls for gas cooker

Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times. There must be no flammable objects near the gas oven when it is being lit. If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven. If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre. If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to " " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again. Parts of the gas oven become very hot during operation. Never touch hot parts with bare hands. Place the meals, wire rack and drip pan into the gas oven so that they do not come into contact with the flame. Only ignite the oven and grill when the oven door is open. Always leave the oven door half open when grilling. Do not use the grill for longer than 25 minutes.

117Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

The gas oven is equipped with electronic ignition.

The meaning of the symbols on the control knobs (Fig. 131,1 and Fig. 132,1) of the two gas ovens is identical:

and mean oven

and mean grill.

Switching the oven on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven". Open oven door completely. The safety switch then releases the ignition. Press and hold control knob and turn it anti-clockwise to the required set- ting. Keep control knob pressed for a further 5-10 seconds. Ignition will take place automatically. Release control knob. Close oven door.

Switching the grill on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven". Open the oven door to at least the first locking position (approx. 45). Press and hold control knob and turn it clockwise to the grill symbol. Keep control knob pressed for a further 5-10 seconds. Ignition will take place automatically. Release control knob.

There are two different versions of the gas oven, depending on the model. Although their appearance is not identical, operation is the same for both. Depending on the model the gas oven may come equipped with a grill. Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max- imum temperature without any contents. When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply. A safety switch prevents ignition when the oven door is closed. If the ignition procedure fails repeatedly, turn the control knob to " ". Wait at least 1 minute and then ignite the gas oven manually. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven. If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre. Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 131 Gas oven (Dometic TecTower) Fig. 132 Gas oven (Dometic)

Do not close the oven door when grilling.

118 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

Switching off: Turn the control knob to " ". The flame fades. Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

9.5.3 Microwave oven (special equipment)

Switching on: Press the key (Fig. 133,3) to open the door and place food into the cooking area. Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages. Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 133,1). Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 133,2). Cooking begins.

The end of the cooking process is signalled by a signal tone. The microwave oven will switch off automatically.

Switching off: Press the key (Fig. 133,3) to open the door and take out the food.

Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user. The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should never be removed. Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed. Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage. Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation. If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and interrupt the power supply.

Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross in place. Use only crockery suitable for microwave use.

The microwave oven only functions with correct 230 V power supply. In the case of fluctuations of the voltage or of voltage below 230 V, the microwave oven switches itself off completely. Therefore, do not switch on additional 230 V appliances when the microwave oven is in operation. Particularly in southern countries it happens that the line voltage is described as having 230 V but it really does not amount to this value. So it may happen that the microwave oven cannot be operated in these countries. Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 133 Operating controls for micro- wave oven

119Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

9.5.4 Extractor hood (partially special equipment)

The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The powerful fan blows the cooking steam directly outside. To switch on the extractor hood, press the flip switch (Fig. 134,1).

9.6 Refrigerator During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed.

9.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill

Removal: Push sliding trap (Fig. 135,1) upward. Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

Fig. 134 Extractor hood

When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill. Otherwise water can enter during rain. The cooling power of the refrigerator depends on the vehicle setup. The cooling power can decrease if the vehicle is inclined by 5 or more. There- fore, always park the vehicle on level ground. Absorption refrigerators operate at normal room temperature (approx. 21 C) within the specified temperature range. At significantly higher ambient temperatures (> 30 C), the cooling power is reduced. This is because the "evaporating temperature" of the refrigerant is lower in absorption refrigerators than it is in compressor refrigerators.

Fig. 135 Refrigerator ventilation grill (with sliding trap)

120 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

Removal: Turn screw (Fig. 136,1) one quarter turn using a coin. Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

9.6.2 Operation (Dometic 8 series with manual ignition)

Operating modes The refrigerator has 3 operating modes:

Gas operation 230 V AC 12 V DC

The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.

Gas operation

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator".

Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 137,2) to " ". Press the control knob (Fig. 137,3), turn it to the highest level and hold it down. Wait until gas gets into the burner.

Fig. 136 Refrigerator ventilation grill (with screw)

Select only one energy source. Even when the 12 V power supply is switched off, a small electrical power flows which puts an extra load on the living area battery. Always switch off the refrigerator for a temporary lay-up.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. It is not permitted to operate the refrigerator with car gas.

Fig. 137 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series)

1 Flame indicator 2 Energy selector switch 3 Control knob for setting the tempera-

ture 4 Gas ignition button

121Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

Press the gas ignition button (Fig. 137,4) and keep it pressed. Ignition will take place automatically. Keep gas ignition button (Fig. 137,4) pressed down until the flame indicator (Fig. 137,1) becomes green and then release it. Keep the control knob (Fig. 137,3) pressed for another 10 to 15 seconds, then release it. Adjust the refrigerating temperature with the control knob.

Switching off: Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off. Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Electrical operation

The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:

230 V AC 12 V DC

Switching the 230 V operation on:

Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 137,2) to " ". Use the control knob (Fig. 137,3) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.

Switching the 230 V operation off:

Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.

Switching the 12 V operation on:

Set the energy selector switch (Fig. 137,2) to " ". Use the control knob (Fig. 137,3) to adjust the refrigerating temperature.

Switching the 12 V operation off:

Set energy selector switch to " ". Refrigerator is switched off.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter battery of the towing vehicle. The starter battery of the towing vehicle only sup- plies the refrigerator with 12 V when the vehicle engine is running and the alternator receives adequate voltage. When the vehicle engine is not running, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.

9.6.3 Operation (Dometic 8 series with manual power selection MES)

Operating modes The refrigerator has 3 operating modes:

Gas operation 230 V AC 12 V DC

The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.

Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated electrically.

Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc- tion manual.

122 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

Gas operation

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator". Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 138,1) down for 2 sec- onds in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode chosen most recently lights up. If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 138,1) until the gas operating indicator " " lights up. Gas supply is open. Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been completed successfully. Use switch (Fig. 138,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.

Switching off: Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrig- erator is switched off. Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Electrical operation

The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:

Select only one energy source. The refrigerator always requires a 12 V control voltage, regardless of which type of energy it is using. The control voltage is present as soon as the transformer/rectifier is switched on. Therefore the closed circuit current always flows even if the refrigerator is switched off. Always switch off the transformer/rectifier for a temporary lay-up.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

Fig. 138 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with MES)

1 On/off switch/energy selector switch 2 Display-LED "open door" (only for central locking system of the refrigerator door) 3 Display-LED "fault" 4 Operating indicators 5 Display-LED "temperature range" 6 Switch for temperature setting 7 Door opener (only for refrigerator door central locking system)

Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated electrically.

123Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

230 V AC 12 V DC

Switching the 230 V operation on:

Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 138,1) down for 2 sec- onds in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode chosen most recently lights up. If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 138,1) several times until the operating indicator 230 V " " lights up. Use switch (Fig. 138,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.

Switching the 230 V operation off:

Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrig- erator is switched off.

Switching the 12 V operation on:

Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 138,1) down for 2 sec- onds in order to switch on the appliance. The LED of the operating mode chosen most recently lights up. If appropriate press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 138,1) several times until the operating indicator 12 V " " lights up. Use switch (Fig. 138,6) to adjust refrigerating temperature.

Switching the 12 V operation off:

Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch for 2 seconds. Refrig- erator is switched off.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter battery of the towing vehicle. The starter battery of the towing vehicle only sup- plies the refrigerator with 12 V when the vehicle engine is running and the alternator receives adequate voltage. When the vehicle engine is not running, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.

9.6.4 Operation (Dometic 8 series with automatic power selection AES)

Operating modes

Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

Fig. 139 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with AES)

1 On/off switch/energy selector switch 2 Display-LED "open door" (only for central locking system of the refrigerator door) 3 Display-LED "fault" 4 Operating indicator 5 Display-LED "temperature range" 6 Switch for temperature setting 7 Door opener (only for refrigerator door central locking system)

124 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). If auto- matic operation (AU) is selected, the AES automatically selects the optimum energy source and regulates the refrigerator operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not required. The AES selects from the following types of power:

230 V AC Gas 12 V DC

Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.

In the case of a fault, the LED display fault will flash " " (Fig. 139,3).

230 V operation If the automatic mode is selected and the 230 V supply is switched on, the AES selects this energy source first.

12 V operation 12 V operation is only selected by the AES if the engine of the towing vehicle is running and the alternator supplies sufficient 12 V operating power.

Gas operation

If the 230 V power supply is not connected and the engine of the towing vehicle is not running the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the ignition fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by blast of wind, the ignition is activated immediately and re- ignites the gas. In the case of a fault in gas operation the text "GAS" flashes in the operating indicator (Fig. 139,4).

Change-over between energy sources

When changing over from 230 V or 12 V to gas, delay times are built into the AES. For example, when changing over from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15 minute delay is built in the AES. This prevents a change-over to gas oper- ation when the vehicle is stopped briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).

The refrigerator always requires a 12 V control voltage, regardless of which type of energy it is using. The control voltage is present as soon as the transformer/rectifier is switched on. Therefore the closed circuit current always flows even if the refrigerator is switched off. Always switch off the transformer/rectifier for a temporary lay-up.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator".

Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy selector switch.

125Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances 9

Refrigerating temperature control

When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually by using the switch for temperature setting (Fig. 139,6). The indicator LEDs (Fig. 139,5) show the selected thermostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the switch. It takes a few hours till the refrig- erator reaches its normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.

Manual operation

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator". Press the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 139,1) down for 2 sec- onds in order to switch on the appliance. The operating mode selected most recently is shown in the operating indicator (Fig. 139,4). Select the energy type with the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 139,1). Set the refrigerating temperature on the switch for temperature setting (Fig. 139,6). The indicator LEDs (Fig. 139,5) show the selected thermostat position.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living area battery.

Switching off: Press down the on/off switch/energy selector switch (Fig. 139,1) for 2 sec- onds. All displays close. Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

9.6.5 Refrigerator door locking mechanism With some models, the refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The specifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the freezer compartment.

If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur- rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply.

Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked in the closed position.

Lock the refrigerator door in ventilation position when the refrigerator is switched off. This prevents mould forming.

126 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Appliances9

There are two positions for locking the refrigerator door in place:

Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in oper- ation Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrig- erator is switched off

Dometic 8 series

Opening: Press the release button (Fig. 140,1) and open the refrigerator door.

Closing: Close the refrigerator door. The lock hook engages audibly.

When the vehicle has been positioned, the lock hook can be fixed. The refrig- erator door can now be opened without having to press the release button.

Fixing the lock hook: Press the fixture (Fig. 141,1) upwards. The lock hook (Fig. 141,2) is pressed upwards and has no function.

Unlocking the lock hook: Push the lock hook (Fig. 141,2) down. The lock hook functions again.

Locking in the ventilation position:

Open the refrigerator door. Press down the unlocking device (Fig. 142,2). Push locking device (Fig. 142,1) forwards (Fig. 143).

If the refrigerator door is closed now, a gap will remain between the refrigerator door and the refrigerator.

Fig. 140 Release button of the refriger- ator door (Dometic 8 series)

Fig. 141 Lock hook fixture

Fig. 142 Locking device in normal posi- tion

Fig. 143 Locking device in ventilation position

127Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

10Sanitary fittingsChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the car- avan. The instructions address the following topics:

switch for the water pump water tank waste water tank complete water system toilet compartment toilet

10.1 Water supply, general

The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap. A canister or a waste water tank collects the waste water.

Fill water tank from supply systems that have been verified to provide drinking water quality. Only use such hoses or containers when filling that have been approved for use with drinking water. Thoroughly rinse filling hose or container with drinking water before use (2 to 3 times capacity). Empty filling hose or container completely after use and close openings of the filling hose or container. Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes. In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system before using the vehicle.

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Make sure that the 12 V power supply on the panel is switched off. Otherwise, the water pump will overheat and may get damaged. Leave the water taps on in central posi- tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way. The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

Before using the water fittings: Connect the 230 V power supply and switch on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker, or connect the caravans electrics to the towing vehicle. Otherwise the water pump will not work. (This only applies to caravans that are not equipped with a separate battery.) When the water tank is re-filled, an air bubble may form at the bottom of the pump. This air bubble will prevent water from being drawn in. Shake the water pump up and down energetically in the water.

128 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

10.2 Switch for water pump (Belcanto Nordic models)

The switch for the water pump is installed in the wardrobe.

Switching on the water pump:

Press upper part of the flip switch (Fig. 144,2). The indicator lamp (Fig. 144,1) lights up.

Switching off the water pump:

Press lower part of the flip switch (Fig. 144,2). The indicator lamp (Fig. 144,1) goes out.

10.3 Water tank

10.3.1 Water tank 22 l with external flap (special equipment) The water tank is mobile or portable.

When transporting the water tank, close it with the cap (Fig. 145,1).

Filling the water tank with drinking water:

Close all water taps. Open service flap (Fig. 145,3) (see chapter 6). Pull the water pump out of the water tank. Pull out the water tank (Fig. 145,2). Clean or disinfect water tank. Fill the water tank with drinking water.

Fig. 144 Switch for water pump

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

Fig. 145 Water tank 22 l

129Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Pouring water: Open the water taps.

Emptying the water tank: Close all water taps. Open service flap (Fig. 145,3) (see chapter 6). Pull the water pump out of the water tank. Pull out the water tank (Fig. 145,2) and empty it.

10.3.2 Water tank 40 l

The drinking water filler neck is on the right or left side of the vehicle, depending on the model. The drinking water filler neck is labelled by the word "WASSER" (water)

(Fig. 146,1) or marked by the symbol " " (Fig. 147,1). The cap is open and closed using the key for the external flap locks. The water tank is built into the seating group.

Filling the water tank with drinking water:

Open drinking water filler neck (Fig. 146 or Fig. 147) (see chapter 6). Clean or disinfect water tank. Fill the water tank with drinking water.

Pouring water: Open the water taps.

Emptying the water tank: Close all water taps. Turn the handle (Fig. 148,1) on the water tank in an anticlockwise direction as far as it will go. The stopper (Fig. 149,1) at the bottom of the tank is lifted.

Fig. 146 Drinking water filler neck Fig. 147 Drinking water filler neck (alter- native)

Fig. 148 Water tank Fig. 149 Stopper

A separate switch for the water pump is installed in the Belcanto Nordic model. If such a switch is present, first switch on the water pump, then turn on the water taps.

130 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Let the water drain out. Turn the handle (Fig. 148,1) on the water tank in a clockwise direction as far as it will go. The stopper at the bottom of the tank (Fig. 149,1) closes the drain.

10.4 Waste water tank (special equipment)

Emptying: Use the cap (Fig. 150,3) to close the opening of the waste water tank (Fig. 150,1). Use the handle (Fig. 150,2) to pull out the waste water tank. Fold the carrying handle (Fig. 150,4) up and upright the waste water tank. Completely empty the waste water tank at disposal stations that are espe- cially provided for this purpose.

10.5 Filling the water system

Before commencing the journey, empty the waste water tank.

If there is any risk of frost, empty the waste water tank. Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.

Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or car- avan sites especially provided for this purpose.

Fig. 150 Waste water tank, mobile

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

131Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Position the vehicle horizontally. Connect the 230 V power supply and switch on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker. If the vehicle is equipped with a self-sufficiency package with bat- tery, it is not necessary to connect it to a 230 V power supply. Clean or disinfect water system. Close all water taps. Switch off the boiler. Close all drain cocks. To do this, position the drain cock's rocking lever (Fig. 151,1) horizontally or turn the drain cock's cap (Fig. 152,1) in a clock- wise direction. Close the drainage opening of the water tank. Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling. If necessary, switch on the water pump using the separate switch. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water pipes with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. Close all water taps. Check that the cap on the water tank is not leaking.

10.6 Emptying the water system

Fig. 151 Drain cock (with rocking lever) Fig. 152 Drain cock (with twist cap)

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Make sure that the 12 V power supply on the panel is switched off. Otherwise, the water pump will overheat and may get damaged. Leave the water taps on in central posi- tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water-carrying components can be avoided in this way.

Take note of the environmental tip in this chapter.

132 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. Frost damage and deposits are avoided in this way:

Position the vehicle horizontally. Switch off the 230 V power supply on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker. If necessary, switch off the water pump at the separate switch. Open all drain cocks. To do this turn the drain cock's cap in an anticlock- wise direction or set the drain cock's rocking lever in a vertical position. Open the drainage opening of the water tank. Set water tap in kitchen and shower compartment (toilet compartment) in an exact central position (hot cold), and open. Hang the shower handset up in the shower position. Remove the cap of the water tank. Hold the water pump up until the water pipes are completely empty. Check whether the water tank is completely empty. Blow out the remaining water in the water pipes (max. 0.5 bar). Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tip in this chapter. Empty toilet cassette. Take note of the environmental tip in this chapter. After emptying, leave all water taps open in the central position. Leave all drain cocks open.

10.7 Toilet compartment

10.8 Toilet

Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.

For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet clothing, close the toilet compartment door and open the window or the toilet compartment skylight. This improves the air circulation. Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray. After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise cracks can appear in the shower tray over time. After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting. Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in the section 11.2.

If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage tank (cassette). Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight of a person and could break. Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detri- mental effect on the sealing rubbers.

133Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Depending on the design, the toilet is flushed either directly via the vehicle's water system, or via a separate water tank.

10.8.1 Swivel toilet (Thetford C-200)

Preparing toilet: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette and pull the retaining clip upwards to remove the Thetford cassette.

Pull out the Thetford cassette as far as it can go. Tip the Thetford cassette slightly and then pull it out completely.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.

The Thetford cassette can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

Fig. 153 Pulling the retaining clip

Fig. 154 Removing the Thetford cas- sette

134 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Place the Thetford cassette upright. Turn the drainage neck upwards. Remove the cap of the drainage neck.

Fill the Thetford cassette with the specified quantity of sanitary liquid. Then add enough water to completely cover the bottom of the Thetford cas- sette. Close drainage neck with the cap. Return the drainage neck to its original position.

Fig. 155 Turning drainage neck

Never put the sanitary liquid directly in the toilet bowl.

Fig. 156 Filling with sanitary liquid

When inserting, do not use force. The Thetford cassette can be damaged.

135Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Push the Thetford cassette back to its original position.

Ensure that the Thetford cassette is secured by the retaining clip. Lock the flap for the Thetford cassette.

Using the toilet: Move the toilet bowl into a convenient position.

Fig. 157 Inserting the Thetford cassette

Fig. 158 Thetford cassette secured

Fig. 159 Rotating the toilet bowl

136 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Fill the toilet bowl with some water. Press the flush button. Flushing con- tinues as long as the button is pressed. Use the toilet.

C-200 S cassette With the C-200 S cassette, proceed as follows to flush the toilet:

Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise direction.

Flush the toilet. Press the flush button. After flushing close the sliding trap.

Fig. 160 Pre-flush

Fig. 161 Operating the sliding trap

Fig. 162 Operating the flush

137Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

C-200 E cassette With the C-200 E cassette, proceed as follows to flush the toilet:

Open the sliding trap. To do this, press the left side of the sliding trap button.

Flush the toilet. Press the flush button. After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this, press the right side of the sliding trap button.

Emptying the Thetford cassette:

Open the flap for the Thetford cassette and pull the retaining clip upwards to remove the Thetford cassette. Pull out the Thetford cassette as far as it can go. Tip the Thetford cassette slightly and then pull it out completely.

Fig. 163 Opening the sliding trap

Fig. 164 Closing the sliding trap

The Thetford cassette can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

Fig. 165 Removing the Thetford cas- sette

138 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Take the Thetford cassette to a proper disposal area. As you do this, point the drainage neck upwards.

Turn the drainage neck upwards. Remove the cap of the drainage neck. Point the Thetford cassette with the drainage neck downwards. Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The Thetford cassette empties. Rinse the Thetford cassette thoroughly with fresh water. Close drainage neck with the cap. Return the drainage neck to its original position.

Prepare the Thetford toilet for use. Push the Thetford cassette back to its original position. Ensure that the Thetford cassette is secured by the retaining clip. Lock the flap for the Thetford cassette.

Fig. 166 Carrying the Thetford cassette

Fig. 167 Emptying the Thetford cas- sette

Fig. 168 Inserting the Thetford cassette

139Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

10.8.2 Toilet with fixed seat (Thetford C-402) The Thetford toilet of some models is equipped with its own water tank.

Filling the water tank: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette. Swing the fresh water filler neck towards the outside.

Remove the screw cap. Fill with fresh water until the fluid level reaches the top edge. This corre- sponds to approx. 15 l.

Close the screw cap. Swivel the fresh water filler neck inwards.

Fig. 169 Fresh water filler neck, swung out

Fig. 170 Filling with fresh water

Fig. 171 Fresh water filler neck, swung in

The Thetford cassette can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

140 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Preparing toilet: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette and pull the retaining clip upwards to remove the Thetford cassette.

Pull out the Thetford cassette as far as it can go. Tip the Thetford cassette slightly and then pull it out completely.

Place the Thetford cassette upright. Turn the drainage neck upwards. Remove the cap of the drainage neck.

Fig. 172 Pulling the retaining clip

Fig. 173 Removing the Thetford cas- sette

Fig. 174 Turning drainage neck

Never put the sanitary liquid directly in the toilet bowl.

141Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Fill the Thetford cassette with the specified quantity of sanitary liquid. Then add enough water to completely cover the bottom of the Thetford cas- sette. Close drainage neck with the cap. Return the drainage neck to its original position.

Push the Thetford cassette back to its original position.

Ensure that the Thetford cassette is secured by the retaining clip. Lock the flap for the Thetford cassette.

Fig. 175 Filling with sanitary liquid

When inserting, do not use force. The Thetford cassette can be damaged.

Fig. 176 Inserting the Thetford cassette

Fig. 177 Thetford cassette secured

142 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Using the toilet: Fill the toilet bowl with some water. Press the flush button. Flushing con- tinues as long as the button is pressed. Use the toilet.

Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise direction.

Flush the toilet. Press the flush button. After flushing close the sliding trap again. To do this turn the slide lever in a clockwise direction.

Fig. 178 Pre-flush

Fig. 179 Operating the sliding trap

Fig. 180 Operating the flush

The Thetford cassette can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

143Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Emptying the Thetford cassette:

Open the flap for the Thetford cassette and pull the retaining clip upwards to remove the Thetford cassette. Pull out the Thetford cassette as far as it can go. Tip the Thetford cassette slightly and then pull it out completely.

Place the Thetford cassette upright on the wheels. Press down the handle of the draw bar and move away from the Thetford cassette. The lock of the draw bar releases itself. Pull the draw bar out completely by the handle. Take the Thetford cassette to a proper disposal area. Insert the draw bar completely using the handle.

Turn the drainage neck upwards. Remove the cap of the drainage neck. Point the Thetford cassette with the drainage neck downwards.

Fig. 181 Removing the Thetford cas- sette

Fig. 182 Transporting the Thetford cas- sette

Fig. 183 Emptying the Thetford cas- sette

144 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

Activate the aeration knob with your thumb. The Thetford cassette empties. Rinse the Thetford cassette thoroughly with fresh water. Close drainage neck with the cap. Return the drainage neck to its original position.

Prepare the Thetford toilet for use. Push the Thetford cassette back to its original position. Ensure that the Thetford cassette is secured by the retaining clip. Lock the flap for the Thetford cassette.

Emptying the water tank: Open the sliding trap. To do this, turn the slide lever in an anticlockwise direction. Press the flush button until water ceases to flow into the bowl. Close the sliding trap. To do this turn the slide lever in a clockwise direction.

Fig. 184 Inserting the Thetford cassette

Fig. 185 Emptying the water tank

145Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Open the flap for the Thetford cassette. Swing the fresh water filler neck towards the outside. Remove the screw cap from the fresh water filler neck. Turn the fresh water filler neck in an anticlockwise direction until the residual water flows out. Turn the fresh water filler neck back in a clockwise direction. Screw the screw cap onto the fresh water filler neck. Swivel the fresh water filler neck inwards. Empty Thetford cassette.

Fig. 186 Emptying the fresh water filler neck

146 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Sanitary fittings10

147Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care 11

11CareChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

exterior of the vehicle interior water system extractor hood air conditioning unit winter operation

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time. The checklist address the following topics:

temporary lay-up winter lay-up start-up after a lay-up

11.1 External care 11.1.1 General

Standard external care consists of regular washing. The use and the environ- mental conditions will determine how often the vehicle needs to be washed. Wash the vehicle more frequently in areas which are exposed to heavy air pol- lution or heavy traffic or roads treated with de-icing salts. If the vehicle is exposed to salty and humid air (coastal areas, humid climates), wash the vehicle more frequently. Do not park under trees if at all possible. The resin-like discharge which many trees secrete, give the paintwork a matt look and can promote the onset of cor- rosion. Wash off bird droppings straight away and thoroughly, as the acid it contains is extremely corrosive.

11.1.2 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner

Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the oper- ating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner. When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm. Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high- pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 C. Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may enter the interior.

Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be damaged. Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pres- sure cleaner. The external applications could come off.

148 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care11

11.1.3 Washing the vehicle

Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose. Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures. Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth. Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush. In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water. Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner. Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow and the sealing of the surface remains intact. Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc. Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.

11.1.4 Windows of acrylic glass Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.

11.1.5 Hot galvanized chassis Salt deposits damage the hot galvanized chassis and can cause white rust. But so-called white rust represent no defects. It is only a visual damage. The most frequent causes for white rust are:

Abrasives and de-icing salts (e.g. when driving during winter months) Condensation (e.g. by covering the vehicle with plastic foils or awning) Humidity (e.g. by parking the vehicle in high grass, in puddles or sludge) Cleaning agents (e.g. by cleaning with aggressive cleaning agents)

Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.

Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the surface! Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish washing liquid and a soft cloth. Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-con- taining additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks may result from their use. Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone- removing agents) with acrylic glass. Do not clean vehicle in car wash. Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows. Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water. Apply talcum powder to rubber seals.

An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

149Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care 11

Snow (e.g. by standing too long in snow) Defective ventilation (e.g. by covering with aprons in the floor area)

To avoid formation of white rust or to remove any existing white rust, we rec- ommend the following method:

After driving in winter, rinse out the hot galvanized surfaces with clean water. If hot galvanized parts are affected by white rust, clean with a zinc cleaner (e.g. Poligrat).

11.1.6 Underbody The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately. Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.

11.1.7 Waste water tank Clean the waste water tank after every use of the vehicle.

Cleaning: Empty the waste water tank. Open the cleaning opening on the waste water tank. Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water.

11.2 Interior care

Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers and service centres will be happy to advise you.

If possible, treat stains immediately. Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see section 11.1.4). Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or scourers. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness and formation of cracks. Hair colourants, nail varnish, cigarette ash and similar substances may cause permanent stains or discolouration. For this reason, you should pre- vent these substances from getting onto plastic parts. If they do get onto plastic parts, you should remove these substances immediately. Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps. Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying products for decalcification. Save water. Mop up all remaining water. Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.

150 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care11

Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted surfaces. Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery. Always have it cleaned. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it does not loose its colour.

Clean upholstery made of novalife with clear water only. Leather covers should be cleaned with a cotton cloth and a mild soap (curd soap). Make sure that the leather is not soaked through and that no water seeps through the seams of the leather covers. Curtains and net curtains should be dry cleaned. Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo. Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor covering may stick together. Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which may cause scratching or grooves. Clean the burners on the gas cooker using a damp cloth only. Prevent any water from penetrating the burner covers. Water may damage the burners on the gas cooker. Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 C (curd soap). Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attach- ment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 C (curd soap).

11.3 Water system 11.3.1 Cleaning the water tank

Empty the water tank and close the drainage opening. Remove the cap of the water tank. Fill water tank with water and some washing-up liquid (do not use any scourers). Using a trade standard brush for washing dishes, scrub the water tank until there is no longer any visible deposit. Scrub also the pump housing. If possible, clean fresh water sensors through the cleaning openings by hand. Rinse water tank with copious amounts of drinking water.

For information about the use of maintenance products, our representa- tives and service centres will be glad to advise.

151Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care 11

11.3.2 Cleaning the water pipes

Empty the water system. Close all drain holes and drain cocks. Fill mixture of water and cleaning agent into the water tank. Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio. Open the drain cocks one by one. Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the respective drain. Close the drain cocks. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the drain. Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them. Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the drain. Close all water taps. Flush the toilet several times. Allow the cleaning agent to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct disposal. For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again several times over.

11.3.3 Disinfecting the water system

Empty the water system. Close all drain holes and drain cocks. Fill mixture of water and disinfectant into the water tank. Observe the man- ufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio. Open the drain cocks one by one. Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has reached the respective drain. Close the drain cocks.

Only use suitable cleaning agents as sold by the specialist trade.

Collect any emerging mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct dis- posal.

Only use suitable disinfectants as sold by the specialist trade.

Collect any emerging mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.

152 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care11

Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has reached the drain. Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them. Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and disinfectant has reached the drain. Close all water taps. Flush the toilet several times. Allow the disinfectant to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc- tions. Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal. For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again several times over.

11.4 Extractor hood Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.

Cleaning the filter: Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.

11.5 Air conditioning unit 11.5.1 Dometic

A lint filter and an activated carbon filter are each located in the lower part of the air conditioning system ceiling unit (Fig. 187,2) behind the ventilation grills (Fig. 187,1 and 3). The lint filters must be cleaned at regular intervals and replaced if necessary. The manufacturer recommends replacing the activated carbon filter yearly. On the left side of the ceiling unit (outside of the vehicle) is located the drainage opening for the condensation. Keep the drain openings free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.

Fig. 187 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

153Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care 11

11.5.2 Telair Every now and then clean the filter and the ventilation grilles on the outside of the housing. How often cleaning is necessary depends on how often the air conditioning unit is used. Do not wait to clean the filter and the ventilation grill until the performance of the air conditioning unit has noticeably decreased.

Cleaning the filter: Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid. Allow the filter to dry thoroughly before reassembly.

Cleaning the ventilation grill: Use a brush to remove coarse dirt or deposits from the external ventilation grilles. If a cleaning solution is used, ensure that no water ingresses into the inside of the housing.

11.6 Winter care De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime. Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.

11.6.1 Preparations

Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as neces- sary. Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation system and the heater. Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody. Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.

11.6.2 Winter operation During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.

Only use mild cleaning solutions to clean the filter, never use benzene or solvents.

If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 C. Switch the circulation fan (if there is one) to automatic. In the case of extreme external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes, for example, and counteract the formation of condensation in the storage spaces. If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with winter insulation mats. Keep the waste gas vent, skylights with forced ventilation and mushroom- shaped vents free of snow. For a roof vent, use a vent extension which is at least 10 cm (4 inch) long.

154 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care11

Attach vent extension with a length of at least 10 cm. When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures optimal ventilation. If the vehicle is equipped with a circulation fan, always switch the fan on when the heater is on. Otherwise, there is a danger of overheating for the heater! In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp areas.

11.6.3 At the end of the winter season

Thoroughly clean the underbody. When this is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are removed. Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces. Remove vent extension.

11.7 Lay-up 11.7.1 Temporary lay-up

Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:

If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off. It is only possible to guarantee unrestricted operation during winter in con- nection with the "winter package" from the original equipment.

If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop. Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time.

Activities Done

Chassis Lubricate the moving parts of the caravan coupling

Do not lubricate the friction pads on the stabiliser!

Jack up caravan with suitable support so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move caravan every four weeks. This prevents pressure points on the tyres and wheel bearings

Never use the fitted corner steadies as a car jack but only external support.

Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of forma- tion of cracks!

Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure

Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area

Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.

155Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care 11

11.7.2 Winter lay-up Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:

Body All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry

Air the interior, all storage compartments accessible from the out- side, and the parking space (e.g. garage) every 3 weeks in order to prevent the occurrence of condensation and resulting mould forma- tion

Interior Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover

Clean refrigerator

Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly open

Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove it from the vehicle

Gas system Close regulator tap on the gas bottle

Close all gas isolator taps

Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if they are empty

Electrical system Spray the contacts on the thirteen-pin connector with contact spray

Fully charge the living area battery (if there is one)

Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.

Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply

Water system Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central posi- tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Observe the notes in chapter 10

Activities Done

Activities Done

Chassis Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or protect with varnish

Rectify damage to the paintwork

Body Clean vehicle from outside thoroughly

Keep the forced ventilation open

Clean and grease installed supports

Clean and grease all door and flap hinges

Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms

Rub all rubber seals with talc

Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders

156 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care11

11.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay- up over winter Go through the following checklist before start-up:

Interior Position de-humidifiers

Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place

Air the interior every 3 weeks

Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and drawers

Thoroughly clean the interior

If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle

Electrical system Remove living area battery (if there is one) and store in a place pro- tected from frost (see chapter 8)

Water system Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised store

Complete vehicle Clean the awning area and store in a dry place

Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins

Activities Done

Activities Done

Chassis Check the tyre pressure on all tyres

Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel

Body Check the functioning of the fitted supports

Check that the windows and skylights are working properly

Check that all the external locks are working, such as the external flaps, the filler neck and the conversion door

Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is one)

Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)

Gas system Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and con- nect to the gas pressure regulator

Electrical system Connect to 230 V power supply using the external socket

Fully charge the living area battery (if there is one)

Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.

Connect the living area battery (if there is one) with the 12 V power supply (see chapter 8)

Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, sock- et and all installed electrical appliances

157Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care 11

Water system Disinfect water pipes and water tank

Close all drain cocks and water taps

Check the water taps, drain cocks and water distributors for leaks

Appliances Check the function of the appliances

Change heating fluid of the hot-water heater every 2 years

Activities Done

158 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Care11

159Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance 12

12MaintenanceChapter overview This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work concerning the vehicle. The maintenance instructions address the following topics:

caravan couplings manoeuvring system braking system doors Alde hot-water heater replacing light bulbs spare parts

At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain spare parts.

12.1 Inspection work Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular inter- vals. This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel. Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel possessing this technical knowledge are available for assistance at all service centres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the factory as well as equip- ment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspection of the vehicle. Have the "First Programmed Inspection" carried out at a service centre 12 months after initial registration. Further inspections should be carried out once a year. The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed.

12.2 Maintenance work As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre- quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the vehicle more often. Have the appliances serviced at the intervals specified in the corresponding instruction manuals.

12.3 Stabilisers 12.3.1 General

Clean the stabiliser and the coupling head regularly. Use either thinners or white spirit. When lubricating the stabiliser ensure that no lubricant is on the friction pads.

Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them car- ried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus pre- served. The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in the event of damage and guarantee claims.

160 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance12

12.3.2 AKS 1300

Checking the stabilising device (on the side of the

friction pads)

Prerequisite: AKS 1300 connected, ball diameter 50 mm

Turn the handwheel (Fig. 188,1), until it can be heard and felt that the torque limiting mechanism grates. Direction of rotation: In a clockwise direction. Check distance a:

Distance a > 0 (Fig. 188): Wear within the permissible range.

Distance a = 0 (Fig. 189): Check and, if necessary, replace the friction pads.

12.3.3 AKS 3004

Stabilising device: Checking the friction

pads

Prerequisite: AKS 3004 connected, ball diameter 50 mm

Open the stabilising handle (Fig. 190,1). Close the stabilising handle until a resistance can be felt (the friction pads lie on the ball, they have not been tightened yet).

Friction pads, front and back

The check is made using the indicator in front of the coupling handle (Fig. 190,2).

Fig. 188 Friction control Fig. 189 Friction control

Resetting the friction pads is not required.

Fig. 190 Display friction pads, front and back

Fig. 191 Display friction pads, left and right

161Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance 12

If the green marking is visible, the friction pads and the coupling head are okay. If the red marking is visible, the friction pads or the coupling head are worn out (< 49 mm). Replace the friction pads or the coupling head.

Side friction pads The check is made using the indicator on the pressure pad.

If the arrows on the pressure pad (Fig. 191,2) point to or below the green marking (Fig. 191,3), the friction pads are brand new. If the arrows on the pressure pad point to within the marked areas (Fig. 191,1 and 3), then the friction pads are slightly worn. If the arrows on the friction pad point to or above the red marking (Fig. 191,1), the friction pads are worn out. Replace the friction pads.

12.3.4 WS 3000 D

Checking the stabilising device (on the side of the

friction pads)

Prerequisite: Connection to WS 3000, ball diameter 50 mm

Activate the stabilising mechanism. To do this, press the coupling handle downwards (Fig. 192,2) from the closed position (Fig. 192,1) to its stop limit.

A wear indicator (Fig. 193) with coloured markings (Fig. 193,1) is located on the coupling handle.

If the marking (Fig. 193,2) in the longitudinal hole points to "OK" (green range), the friction pads are okay. If the marking points to "STOP" (red range), the friction pads are worn out and must be replaced.

Resetting the friction pads is not required.

Fig. 192 Stabilising handle Fig. 193 Wear indicator

It is not possible to reset the friction pads.

162 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance12

12.4 Manoeuvring system

Following each use, remove coarse dirt from the drive elements. Once a year (e.g. before laying up over winter) thoroughly clean and dry the manoeuvring system and lightly grease the guides of the drive elements. To ensure that oil is distributed throughout the drive shafts, swing the drive rollers a few times onto the tyres and back again.

12.5 Braking system Have maintenance work on the braking system carried out by a specialist workshop. Look up the following table for the inspection deadlines.

12.6 Doors To maintain gliding capability between springs and hinges, grease the conver- sion door hinges occasionally.

12.7 Alde hot-water heater

When lubricating, ensure that no oil comes into contact with the drive rollers or tyres.

Model First inspection Braking system Brake lining

BPW chassis

Every 2,000 or 3,000 km or every 12 months

Every 5,000 km or every 12 months

AL-KO chassis

After 1,500 km or after 6 months

Every 10,000 or 15,000 km or every 12 months

Every 5,000 km or every 12 months

We recommend either Molykote PG 65 or Vaseline as lubricants.

Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir. During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the heating fluid. We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera- tion and to check the glycol content. Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after some time. Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mix- ture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 C.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

163Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance 12

12.7.1 Checking the fluid level

Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down. Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 194,3) and "MAX" (Fig. 194,2) on the compensator reservoir (Fig. 194).

12.7.2 Topping up heating fluid

Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles. Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down. Unscrew or pull off the panel. Open the rotary lid (Fig. 194,1) on the compensator reservoir. Remove cover. Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection con- tent must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 C. Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.

12.7.3 Bleeding the heating system

The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators.

Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down. Open bleeding valve (Fig. 195,1) and leave open until no more air escapes.

Fig. 194 Compensator reservoir hot- water heater

The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator res- ervoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark when it is cooled down.

Fig. 195 Bleeding valve of hot-water heater

164 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance12

Close bleeding valve. Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves. Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.

12.8 Replacing bulbs, external

Types of bulbs Different types of bulbs are used in the vehicle. Below, we have described how to change the different types of bulbs.

Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool down before changing bulbs. Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children. Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its glass. The bulb might burst.

A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing the new bulb. Use only bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage (see table "Types of bulbs for exterior lighting"). If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.

Fig. 196 Types of bulbs

Pos. in Fig. 196

Fixture type/bulb type

Changing

1 Plug-in fixture To remove, pull out the bulb

To mount, push the bulb into the socket with gentle pressure

2 Bayonet socket To remove, press the bulb down and turn in an anticlockwise direction

To insert, place the bulb in the socket and turn in a clockwise direction

3 Cylindrical bulbs To remove and to insert, carefully bend the contacts of the lamp holder outwards

4 Halogen bulb To remove, release retaining springs

After inserting, hook the retaining springs again

165Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance 12

12.8.1 Front lights

The front lights (Fig. 197,1) have LEDs. To change the LEDs, contact an authorised dealer or a service centre.

12.8.2 Rear lights

Undo five housing screws. Remove housing. Remove bulb. Put in a new bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.8.3 Side lights

Fig. 197 Front lights

1 Front light

Fig. 198 Rear lights

1 Rear light 2 Brake light 3 Direction indicator 4 Reverse light 5 Fog tail light 6 Licence plate light 7 Brake light

Only replace the third brake light (Fig. 198,7) entirely.

Fig. 199 Side lights

1 Side marker light 2 Marker light

166 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance12

Marker lights The marker lights (Fig. 199,2) have LEDs. To change the LEDs, contact an authorised dealer or a service centre.

Side marker light The side marker light (Fig. 199,1) is fixed at the top of the side wall area.

Remove housing. Remove bulb. Put in a new bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.8.4 Types of bulbs for exterior lighting

12.9 Replacing bulbs, internal

Item no.

Exterior lighting Type of bulb

Front 1 Front light LED

Rear 1 Rear light Ba15s 12 V 5 W

2 Brake light Ba15s 12 V 21 W

3 Direction indicator Ba15s 12 V 21 W orange

4 Reverse light Ba15s 12 V 21 W

5 Fog tail light Ba15s 12 V 21 W

6 Licence plate light Soffitte 12 V 5 W

7 Third brake light LED

Side 1 Side marker light Ba15s 12 V 5 W

2 Marker light LED

Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool down before changing bulbs. Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 230 V fuse box before changing bulbs. Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children. Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its glass. The bulb might burst. Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard! Do not replace the LEDs in lamps with standard light bulbs. Risk of fire due to intense heat build up.

A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing the new bulb. Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage. If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.

167Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance 12

12.9.1 Ceiling lamp

The ceiling lamp has LEDs.

Changing bulbs: Press the two ends (Fig. 200,2) of the spring ring (Fig. 200,1) together and remove. Remove the housing (Fig. 200,3) with LED from the lamp. Pull out the plug and fully replace the housing with LED. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.9.2 Ceiling lamp

Halogen bulb 12 V/10 W

Changing bulbs: Carefully unclip and remove the transparent plastic insert (Fig. 201,1). Remove bulb. Put in a new bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

Fig. 200 Ceiling lamp

Fig. 201 Ceiling lamp

168 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance12

12.9.3 Recessed halogen light (flat)

Halogen bulb G4 12 V/10 W The recessed halogen light (Fig. 202,2) is installed flush with the panel.

Changing bulbs: Use a suitable tool (e.g. a screwdriver) to lever out the internal cover ring with glass disk (Fig. 202,1) from the housing. Remove halogen bulb. Put in a new halogen bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.9.4 Recessed light with LED

Changing bulbs: Contact a dealer or service centre.

Fig. 202 Recessed halogen light (flat)

Fig. 203 Recessed light

LED lamps have a very long life. It is not normally necessary to replace a lamp.

169Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance 12

12.9.5 Halogen spotlight (swivelling)

Halogen bulb 12 V/10 W

Changing bulbs: Turn outer ring (Fig. 204,2) in an anticlockwise direction until it separates from the housing. Remove retaining ring (Fig. 204,1). Remove halogen bulb. Put in a new halogen bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.10 Spare parts

For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an author- ised specialist workshop. The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement. Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:

Fuses Bulbs Water pump (submerged pump)

When ordering spare parts please indicate the chassis number and the vehicle type to the dealer.

Fig. 204 Halogen spotlight (swivelling)

Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety. The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by us have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle. These products are available at the authorised dealer or service centre. The authorised dealer or service centre is informed about admissible tech- nical details and carries out the required work correctly. The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by us may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product. No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by us. This also applies to impermissible alterations to the vehicle.

170 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Maintenance12

The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use. When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.

12.11 Vehicle identification plate

The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 205) with the chassis number is mounted on the front right side, in the gas bottle compartment. Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:

Identifies the vehicle Helps with the procurement of spare parts Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner

12.12 Warning and information stickers There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.

Fig. 205 Vehicle identification plate

1 Chassis number 2 Maximum permissible gross weight 3 Permissible drawbar nose weight 4 Permissible axle load

Always include the chassis number with all inquiries for the customer service office.

Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a service centre.

171Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres 13

13Wheels and tyresChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

tyre selection handling of tyres changing wheels spare wheel support

At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre pressure for your vehicle.

13.1 General

Observe: Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth and external damage. Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by law is reached. Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer and winter tyres). Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The permitted rim and tyre sizes are quoted in the vehicle documents and the authorised dealer or service centre will always be glad to give you advice. Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only then do they reach full strength.

Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in these tyres. When using alloy wheel rims, snow chains should not be used.

In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle and caravan safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights. Tyres on vehicles with tandem axles may wear faster. Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits the year of manufacture.

Example: Week 05, year of manufacture 2011.

172 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres13

Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re- tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise (Fig. 206) after 50 km (30 miles). See section 13.5.2 for tightening torque. When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to 3,000 miles). For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings free from pressure points: Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is changed.

13.2 Tyre selection

The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from the authorised dealers or service centres. Each tyre must fit the vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external dimensions (diameter, width), which are indicated with the standardised size designations. In addition, the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle with regard to weight and speed. Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its load index (= LI, load index code). The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together, load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official component of the com- plete, standardised dimensions description which appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.

Fig. 206 Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise

A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause it to burst.

If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can lapse. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.

173Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres 13

13.3 Tyre specifications

13.4 Handling of tyres

Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured. Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured. Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers significantly increases wear. Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var- ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable. Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result.

13.5 Changing wheels 13.5.1 General instructions

The spare wheel (special equipment) is located in the gas bottle compartment or in a holder underneath the vehicle (special equipment). To change the wheel, use a commercial scissor-type or hydraulic vehicle jack or the AL-KO vehicle jack (special equipment).

Description Explanation

215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q (example)

215 Tyre width in mm

70 Height-to-width proportion in percent

R Tyre design (R = radial)

15 Rim diameter in inches

C Commercial (transporter)

109 Load index code for single tyres

107 Load index code for twin tyres

Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)

The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping. Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake. Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel with the wheel chocks. Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports. Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circum- stances on the bodywork. Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is spec- ified on the vehicle jack's identification plate. Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the tyre.

174 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres13

13.5.2 Tightening torque

No persons may be in the vehicle while it is is raised. Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down under it.

Do not damage the thread of the thread bolt or wheel bolt when changing the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 206). When changing wheels (e.g. alloy wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres), use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. Otherwise the wheels may not be securely fixed or the braking system may not work cor- rectly. The use of wheel rims or tyres that are not approved for the vehicle can make it less than fully roadworthy; such wheel rims or tyres must be sepa- rately inspected and approved by an accredited test centre.

Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard warning triangle. Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre sizes stated in the vehicle documents. If different wheel nuts or wheel bolts are required for the vehicle tyres and the spare wheel, the wheel nuts or wheel bolts for the spare wheel will be supplied with the vehicle.

Fig. 207 Wheel bolts

1 Wheel bolt - spherical 2 Wheel bolt - conical

175Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres 13

13.5.3 Changing a wheel

Rim type Tighten- ing torque

Type Shaft length (SL) Length (L) of wheel bolt [mm]

No. of holes/ Bolt circle/ Centre hole- of rim [mm]

Width across flats

Steel 4-hole 90 Nm (67 ft/lbs)

Cone washer 60 M12x1.5 Q 8.8 Flange 22 (Tol. +1.5/-0.5) SL 24 L 42 (Tol. +1/-0.5)

4/100/- 19

Steel 5-hole 90 Nm (67 ft/lbs)

Spherical R12 M12x1.5 Q 8.8 Flange 24 (Tol. -2) SL 25 L 44 (Tol. +1/-0.5)

5/112/- 19

Light alloy 4-hole OJ13/4, 14/4

120 Nm (89 ft/lbs)

Cone washer 60 M12x1.5 Q 10.9 Flange 21 (Tol. +0.5) SL 28 L 48 (Tol. 0.5)

4/100/66.6 17

Light alloy 4-hole GSM1-1460- 403T1

120 Nm (89 ft/lbs)

Cone washer 60 M12x1.5 Q 10.9 Flange 23 SL 28 L 53.5

4/100/66.6 17

Light alloy 5-hole OJ14/5,15,5

120 Nm (89 ft/lbs)

Cone washer 60 M12x1.5 Q 10.9 Flange 21 (Tol. +0.5) SL 28 L 48 (Tol. 0.5)

5/112/66.6 17

Light alloy 5-hole GSM1-1460- 512T2

120 Nm (89 ft/lbs)

Cone washer 60 M12x1.5 Q 10.9 Flange 23 SL 28 L 53.5

5/112/66.6 17

The footplate of the vehicle jack must be levelly positioned on the ground. Do not tilt the vehicle jack.

176 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres13

Preparing the connected caravan:

Loosen the stabilising device in caravan couplings with stabilising devices. Otherwise the friction pads will be highly loaded. Pull the handbrake of the towing vehicle and go to first gear or reverse gear.

Preparing the disconnected caravan:

Park the vehicle on as even and stable a surface as possible. Apply the handbrake. Place the support wheel diagonal to the direction of travel and secure with suitable tools (Fig. 208).

Changing the wheel: Place chocks or other appropriate objects beneath the opposite wheel of the vehicle to secure it (Fig. 209). Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel support. If the ground is soft, place a stable support such as a wooden board beneath the vehicle jack.

Always insert the insertion profile of the AL-KO vehicle jack (special equipment) into the retention pouch as far as possible. If alloy wheel rims are mounted and a steel spare wheel is mounted after a puncture: Do not drive any further than necessary (car dealer, car workshop, tyre dealer). Only drive at a suitable speed. The different wheels affect driving handling.

A special vehicle jack from AL-KO with holder pockets is available as spe- cial equipment. These holder pockets are mounted on to the frame. The AL-KO jack has a bearing capacity of 800 kg. The wheel you have replaced should be repaired immediately. Take note of the general instructions in this chapter.

Fig. 208 Securing support wheel Fig. 209 Securing vehicle

Fig. 210 Commercial vehicle jack Fig. 211 AL-KO vehicle jack

177Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres 13

Commercial vehicle jack: Position the commercial scissor-type jack (Fig. 210) or hydraulic vehicle jack on the frame or on the axle. AL-KO vehicle jack: Insert the insertion profile (Fig. 211,2) of the AL-KO vehicle jack into the retention pouch (Fig. 211,1) as far as possible. AL-KO vehicle jack: Hold on to the AL-KO vehicle jack with one hand and with the other turn the hand crank (Fig. 211,4) in a clockwise direction until the footplate (Fig. 211,3) is touching the ground and is in a level position. Turn the wheel bolts several times to loosen them, but do not remove them! Lift the vehicle until the wheel has been lifted 2 to 3 cm above the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and take off the wheel. Place the spare wheel on the wheel hub and adjust. Screw in the wheel bolts and slightly tighten them cross-wise. Crank down the vehicle jack and remove it. Using the wheelbrace, tighten the wheel bolts evenly. The target value of the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is 90 Nm (67 ft/lbs) or 120 Nm (89 ft/lbs) (see section 13.5.2).

13.5.4 Changing a wheel at alloy wheel rims

13.6 Spare wheel support 13.6.1 Spare wheel support in gas bottle compartment (partially

special equipment)

The resting surfaces of the wheels on the break drums must be clean and free of burrs. Only use fastening parts provided for to loosen the wheels lightly and ensure that they rest correctly and move freely, subsequently tighten the wheel bolts cross-wise with a suitable wrench. Many axles do not have a centring aid, flange or bolts. It must be ensured that the wheel bolts are equally centered above the bolt circle (no jamming). Alloy wheel rims and steel wheel rims require different wheel bolts. When alloy wheel rims are mounted, the spare wheel (steel wheel rim) is accompanied by suitable wheel bolts.

If the spare wheel support is mounted in the gas bottle compartment, you can only take one gas bottle with you.

178 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres13

The spare wheel support is fitted in the gas bottle compartment. The spare wheel (Fig. 212,2) is available for a surcharge.

Removing the spare wheel: Undo bolt (Fig. 212,1). Remove the spare wheel (Fig. 212,2).

13.6.2 Spare wheel support under the vehicle (special equipment)

The spare wheel support is located under the vehicle near the axle.

Removing the spare wheel: Unhook the safety chain (Fig. 213,2). Loosen and unscrew the star handle (Fig. 213,1). Pull out the spare wheel support (Fig. 213,3) about 10 cm and place it on the ground. Pull out the spare wheel support far enough that you can comfortably access the spare wheel. Unscrew both nuts (Fig. 214,2 and 3). Remove the spare wheel (Fig. 214,1) from the spare wheel support.

13.7 Tyre pressure

Fig. 212 Spare wheel support

Fig. 213 Spare wheel support Fig. 214 Spare wheel fixture

Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious tyre damage. Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle. Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.

179Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres 13

The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pres- sure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres. As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst, check the tyre pressure regularly. The contact surface of the tyre changes, depending on the tyre pressure.

Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.

Fig. 215 Contact surface of the tyre

1 Correct tyre pressure 2 Tyre pressure too low 3 Tyre pressure too high

The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehi- cles. Pressure in hot tyres must be 0.3 bar higher than in cold tyres. Recheck the pressure when the tyres are cold. Tyre pressures in bar. The tyre pressure tolerance is +/- 0.05 bar.

Tyres Maximum per- missible gross weight mono axle (kg)

Maximum per- missible gross weight tandem axle (kg)

Tyre pressure (bar)

155/80 R 13 LI79 Up to 700 3.00

165/80 R 13 LI83 Up to 700 2.50

800 2.75

900 3.00

185 R 14 C LI102 Up to 1100 3.5

1200 3.5

1300 4.00

1400 4.00

1500 4.50

From 1600 2800 4.50

185/60 R 15 C LI94 Up to 1200 2200 4.00

1300 2500 4.00

1350 4.00

185/65 R 14 LI88 1200 3.4

180 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres13

185/70 R 13 LI86 Up to 700 2.50

800 2.70

900 1800 2.70

1000 2000 3.00

185/70 R 13 RF LI90 1200 3.4

185/70 R 14 LI88 Up to 900 1800 2.60

1000 2000 2.80

195 R 14 C LI106 Up to 1100 3.25

1200 3.25

1300 3.50

1400 3.50

1500 4.50

1600 2800 4.50

1700 4.50

From 1800 3500 4.50

195/65 R 14 LI89 Up to 1000 2000 3.00

1100 2200 3.00

195/70 R 14 LI91 Up to 1000 2000 2.50

1100 2200 2.70

195/70 R 14 XL95 Up to 1100 2000 2.90

1200 2200 3.10

1350 3.40

195/70 R 14 RF LI96 Up to 900 1800 2.70

1000 2000 2.90

1100 2200 2.90

1200 3.10

1300 2500 3.30

1400 2800 3.40

195/70 R 15 C LI104 Up to 1100 3.25

1200 3.25

1300 3.50

1400 3.75

1500 2800 4.00

1600 4.25

From 1700 4.50

Tyres Maximum per- missible gross weight mono axle (kg)

Maximum per- missible gross weight tandem axle (kg)

Tyre pressure (bar)

181Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres 13

Max. permissible speed = 100 km/h (60 mph). Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries (see chapter 17). The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case, the Brstner dealer will be happy to provide the newest values.

205 R 14 C LI109 Up to 1600 4.00

1700 4.25

1800 3500 4.25

1900 4.50

205/65 R 15 RF LI98 1500 3.40

215/55 R 16 XL LI97 Up to 1100 2.70

1200 2.70

1300 3.00

1400 3.00

215/70 R 15 C LI109 Up to 1100 3.00

1200 3.25

1300 3.50

1400 3.50

1500 4.00

1600 2800 4.25

1700 4.50

1800 3500 4.50

1900 4.50

Tyres Maximum per- missible gross weight mono axle (kg)

Maximum per- missible gross weight tandem axle (kg)

Tyre pressure (bar)

182 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Wheels and tyres13

183Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14TroubleshootingChapter overview This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle. The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies. The instructions address the following topics:

chassis braking system caravan control system manoeuvring system electrical system gas system gas cooker gas oven microwave oven heater boiler hot water source refrigerator air conditioning unit water supply body

The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist work- shop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.

14.1 Chassis

14.2 Braking system

Fault Cause Remedy

Coupling does not lock in place after being placed on top

Ball larger than 50 mm Remove dirt

Contact customer service

The coupling interiors are soiled and no longer work automatically

Clean well and lubricate (not stabiliser)

Caravan cannot be de- tached

Ball worn Position the caravan and towing vehicle in the same direction and de- tach. Immediately re- place the worn ball

Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author- ised specialist workshop. Follow maintenance or manufacturer specifications.

184 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

14.3 Caravan control system 14.3.1 Caravan control system (ATC)

Fault Cause Remedy

Control LED flashes green (possible to contin- ue journey)

ATC active Self test not yet complete

Drive approx. 30 m with the trailor at a minimum 10 km/h. If the control LED continues to flash, contact customer servic- es

Control LED lights up red (possible to continue journey)

ATC not active Fault in system

Separate the electrical connection between the caravan and the towing vehicle for at least 5 seconds Reconnect If the control LED contin- ues to light up red, con- tact customer services

Control LED flashes red (do not continue journey)

ATC brakes Separate the electrical connection between the caravan and the towing vehicle for at least 5 seconds Reconnect If the control LED contin- ues to flash red, perform a visual check in accord- ance with the manufac- turer's instruction manual and, if necessary, reset the braking system

Control LED does not illu- minate (only possible to continue journey after test)

ATC without power (only possible to continue jour- ney after test)

Connect the electrics be- tween the caravan and the towing vehicle

LED defect Connect the electrics be- tween the caravan and the towing vehicle If the control LED still does not illuminate, per- form a visual check in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instruc- tion manual and contact customer service

185Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.3.2 Caravan control system (IDC)

14.4 Manoeuvring system

Fault Cause Remedy

Control LED flashes green (slowly)

Brake heated up (limited braking effect)

Allow the brake to cool down

Control LED lights up green (briefly, every 5 seconds)

Standby mode Automatic reactivation during driving

Control LED flashes red (1 x flashing) (It is possible to continue driving without the IDC functioning)

Error in the central unit Disconnect and then re- store the connection be- tween the towing vehicle and the caravan If the error is still dis- played, consult customer service

Control LED flashes red (2 x flashing) (It is possible to continue driving without the IDC functioning)

Error in the sensor Contact customer service

Control LED flashes red (3 x flashing) (It is possible to continue driving without the IDC functioning)

Error in the supply (low battery) or in the cables

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Control does not react to the remote control sig- nals

Remote control batteries empty

Change batteries

Plug of the caravan is not inserted into the safety socket

Insert connector

Fuse is defective Replace fuse

Malfunction Perform a reset. To do so, briefly disconnect the living room battery (for approximately 10 sec- onds) or unplug the safe- ty plug and then plug it back in.

Drive rollers do not turn Battery flat Charge the battery

186 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

14.5 Electrical system See chapter 8 for changing the fuses.

Fault Cause Remedy

Road light system does no longer work correctly

Bulb is defective Unscrew cover of the rel- evant light, replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications

Contacts on the plug and/or in the socket have oxidised and/or are con- taminated

Clean contacts and spray with contact spray

Short circuit caused by water in the plug and/or socket

Open plug and/or sock- et, dry out, and spray with contact spray

Cable interruption on the plug and/or socket

Open plug and/or sock- et, re-connect cable (see connection diagram in chapter 8)

Road light system does not match the towing ve- hicle light system

Contact connections within the plug have been reversed

Check contact allocation and wiring on the plug/ connector of the caravan

No 230 V power supply despite connection

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on 230 V auto- matic circuit breaker

12 V power supply in the living area does not work

230 V automatic circuit breaker switched off

Switch on 230 V auto- matic circuit breaker

12 V main switch (if present) is switched off

Switch on the 12 V main switch

Fuse on the power sup- ply unit is defective

Replace fuse

Power supply unit is de- fective

Contact customer service

Interior lighting does no longer work correctly

Bulb is defective Unscrew cover of the rel- evant light, replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications

Fuse on the power sup- ply unit is defective

Replace the fuse on the power supply unit

No voltage from the living area battery (if there is one)

Living area battery is dis- charged

Charge living area bat- tery immediately

Total discharge damages the battery.

If the vehicle is to be laid up for a long period, fully charge the living area battery beforehand

187Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.6 Gas system

Extractor hood does not work

230 V automatic circuit breaker switched off

Switch on 230 V auto- matic circuit breaker

Power supply unit is de- fective

Contact customer service

Fuse on the power sup- ply unit is defective

Replace fuse

Extractor hood defective Contact customer service

Air conditioning unit can- not be switched on or off

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on 230 V auto- matic circuit breaker

Remote control battery is empty

Change remote control battery

In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme- diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.). Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.

Fault Cause Remedy

No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle

Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap

Regulator tap on the gas bottle is closed

Open regulator tap on the gas bottle

External temperature is too low (-42 C for pro- pane gas, 0 C for bu- tane gas)

Wait for higher external temperatures

Built-in appliance is de- fective

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

188 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

14.7 Cooker 14.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven

14.7.2 Microwave oven

14.8 Heater, boiler and hot water source In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

14.8.1 Trumatic S hot-air heater

Fault Cause Remedy

Ignition fuse does not op- erate (flame does not burn after the control knobs are released)

Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob pressed for approx. 15 to 20 seconds after ignition

Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service

Flame extinguishes when being reduced to its mini- mum setting

Thermocouple sensor is incorrectly set

Correctly reset thermo- couple sensor (do not bend). The sensor tip should protrude by 5 mm beyond the burner. The sensor neck should not be more than 3 mm away from the burner ring; if necessary, contact cus- tomer service

Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user.

Fault Cause Remedy

Microwave oven does not cut in

Fuse is defective Replace fuse

Door of the microwave oven is not properly closed

Remove foreign bodies stuck in the door of the microwave oven and close door properly

Fault Cause Remedy

For heater with automatic ignition: Heater does not ignite

Battery on the automatic ignition empty

Change the battery on the automatic ignition

189Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.8.2 Alde heater/boiler

14.8.3 Truma boiler

Fault Cause Remedy

Heating does not ignite with gas operation

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Heating does not ignite at 230 V electrical operation

No 230 V power supply Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Connect 230 V power supply

Heating running, but no heat at the convectors

Circulating pump does not work

Switch on room thermo- stat

Contact customer service

Heating and circulating pump running, but no heat at the convectors

Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater

Fault Cause Remedy

Gas operation Red indicator lamp "Fault" illuminates

Air in the gas pipe sys- tem

Switch off and on again. After two futile ignition at- tempts, wait for 10 minutes before trying again

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Defect of a safety ele- ment

Contact customer service

Green indicator lamp be- hind knob is not lit

Fuse is defective Replace fuse

Fuse in the electronic control unit has been trig- gered

Contact customer service

Living area battery defec- tive

Charge or renew the liv- ing area battery

Red and green indicator lamps are not lit

No power supply Establish the power sup- ply

Fuse is defective Replace the fuse on the power supply unit

190 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

14.8.4 Truma hot water source

14.9 Refrigerator In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

14.9.1 Dometic 8 series

Electrical operation Boiler is connected to power supply but is not heated

Operating switch is switched off

Switch on the operating switch, the indicator lamp on the switch must light up

Operating switch defec- tive

Contact customer service

230 V automatic circuit breaker is switched off

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V power supply dis- connected

Connect 230 V power supply

Overtemperature fuse has triggered

Switch off boiler and switch on after approx. 5 minutes

Heating coil of the boiler is defective

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

The hot water source is connected to power sup- ply but does not heat

Operating switch is switched off

Switch on operating switch; the red indicator lamp must be lit

Operating switch defec- tive

Contact customer service

230 V automatic circuit breaker is switched off

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V power supply dis- connected

Connect 230 V power supply

Fuse is defective Replace fuse

Heating coil in the hot water source is defective

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Fault Cause Remedy

Refrigerator does not switch on when operating in 230 V mode

No 230 V power supply Connect 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V operating voltage too low

Have the 230 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

191Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.9.2 Dometic 8 series with MES

Refrigerator does not switch on when operating in 12 V mode

Contacts on the plug and/or in the socket have oxidised and/or are con- taminated

Clean contacts and spray with contact spray

Short circuit caused by water in the plug and/or socket

Open plug and/or sock- et, dry out, and spray with contact spray

Cable interruption on the plug and/or socket

Open plug and re-con- nect cable

Fuse for refrigerator is defective

Replace fuse

Refrigerator does not switch on when operating in gas mode

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Air in the gas pipe Repeat ignition 3 or 4 times

Cobwebs or burnt resi- due in the burning cham- ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

The desired refrigerating temperature is not achieved

Incorrect setting Set the temperature with the temperature control- ler

Too much fresh food put into it

Set the temperature with the temperature control- ler

In the case of a fault the LED display fault will always light up " ".

Fault Cause Remedy

LED " " flashes No 230 V power supply Connect 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V operating voltage too low

Have the 230 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

LED " " flashes Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V operating voltage too low

Have the 12 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

Fault Cause Remedy

192 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

14.9.3 Dometic 8 series with AES

LED " " flashes Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Cobwebs or burnt resi- due in the burning cham- ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

LEDs for display of the temperature range flash

Temperature sensor de- fective

Contact customer service

LED " " and LEDs for display of the tempera- ture range flash

230 V heater element de- fective

Contact customer service

LED " " and LEDs for display of the tempera- ture range flash

12 V heater element de- fective

Contact customer service

In the case of a fault the LED display fault will always light up " ".

Fault Cause Remedy

Text "230 V" flashes No 230 V power supply Connect 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V operating voltage too low

Have the 230 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

Text "12 V" flashes Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V operating voltage too low

Have the 12 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

Text "GAS" flashes Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Cobwebs or burnt resi- due in the burning cham- ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

Fault Cause Remedy

193Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.10 Air conditioning unit 14.10.1 Dometic

14.10.2 Telair

LEDs for display of the temperature range flash

Temperature sensor de- fective

Contact customer service

Text "HE1" flashes 230 V heater element de- fective

Contact customer service

Text "HE2" flashes 12 V heater element de- fective

Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Air conditioning unit does not start up

No 230 V power supply Connect the vehicle to the local power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Remote control batteries empty

Change remote control batteries

Air conditioning unit does not cool

Temperature below 16 C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Thermostat defective Contact customer service

Air conditioning unit does not warm up

Temperature above 30 C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Thermostat defective Contact customer service

Water is entering the ve- hicle

Drainage holes for con- densation are clogged

Clean air conditioning unit

Seal is defective Contact customer service

No more air circulation Air filter clogged Clean air filter

Fan wheel defective Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Air conditioning unit does not start up

No 230 V power supply Connect 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Remote control batteries empty

Change batteries (2 x AAA)

Air conditioning unit does not cool

Room temperature is lower than the preset temperature

Reset temperature

Fault Cause Remedy

194 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

14.11 Water supply

Air conditioning unit does not heat

Room temperature is higher than the preset temperature

Reset temperature

Insufficient ventilation rat- ing

Ventilation flaps closed Open at least one venti- lation flap

Filter dirty Clean the filter

Water is entering the ve- hicle

Drainage holes for con- densation are clogged

Clean air conditioning unit

Fault Cause Remedy

Leakage water inside the vehicle

A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect water pipes

No water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water

Water drain cock open Close water drain cock

Fuse of the water pump is defective

Replace fuse

Water pump defective Exchange water pump (have it exchanged)

Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or replace

Power pack or power supply unit defect

Contact customer service

Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water

Fuse for toilet is defective Replace fuse

Water drains from the shower tray slowly or does not drain at all

The vehicle is not in a horizontal position

Position the vehicle hori- zontally

Drain on the one-hand le- ver mixer is clogged

Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de- calcify in vinegar water (only for products made from metal)

Milkiness of the water Tank filled with dirty wa- ter

Clean water tank me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Residues in the water tank or water system

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Fault Cause Remedy

195Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.12 Body

Any change in the taste or odour of the water

Tank filled with dirty wa- ter

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Fuel filled into the water tank by mistake

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water. If not suc- cessful: Contact a spe- cialist workshop

Microbiological deposits in the water system

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Deposits in the water tank and/or water-carry- ing components

Water excessively long in the water tank and in wa- ter-carrying components

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Fault Cause Remedy

Flap hinges/door hinges are difficult to operate

Flap/door hinges are not sufficiently lubricated

Lubricate flap hinges/ door hinges with acid- free and resin-free grease

Hinges/joints in the bath- room unit/toilet compart- ment are difficult to operate/make a grating noise

Hinges/joints are not suf- ficiently lubricated

Lubricate hinges/joints with solvent-free and acid-free grease

Spray cans often contain solvents

Storage compartment hinges are difficult to op- erate/make a grating noise

Storage compartment hinges are not sufficiently lubricated

Lubricate storage com- partment hinges with acid-free and resin-free grease

The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement.

Fault Cause Remedy

196 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Troubleshooting14

197Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Special equipment 15

15Special equipment15.1 Weight details for special equipment

Weight details for Brstner special equipment are listed in the table below. If these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calculating the payload. All weight details are approximate. Observe the max. permissible gross weight.

The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by us may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product. Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety. No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by us. This also applies to impermissible alterations to the vehicle.

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

Waste bin - door 1

Waste water pipes, insulated and heated 2

Waste water tank 22 litres 3

Airmix comfort package 1

AL-KO Trailer-Control 5

Caravan control system IDC 6

External shower 1

External socket 1

Oven 13

Direct water supply 3

Skylight Heki 2 11

Design package 11

Drawbar head theft protection 2

Extractor hood 1

Conversion door with window 8

Electric kit: Battery charger, battery, panel 23

Spare wheel 185/70 R 14 18

Spare wheel 195 R 14 C 19

Spare wheel support under the chassis 1

External gas connection 1

Drawbar bike rack for 2 bicycles 4

Rear bike rack for 2 bicycles 10

Floor warming unit 2

Gas bottle (11 kg) made of aluminium 12

Gas bottle switching facility, automatic 5

198 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Special equipment15

Gas alarm system 5

Weight increase 5-10

Smooth plate 30

Holder for flat screen 1

Heater S 5002 8

Insect screen, door (full height) 3

Children's bunk bed with 3 levels 20

Air conditioning unit (Dometic) 40

Air conditioning unit (Telair) 34

Headphones satellite system 1

160-litre refrigerator 14

Microwave oven 14

Minisafe 5

Truma Mover manoeuvring system 35

Roll-up grille 2

Satellite unit (automatic) + LCD television 18

Satellite unit (semi-automatic) + LCD television 17

Service flap (installation dependent on model) 2-3

Bedspread 1

TecTower 16

Chain-stitch rug 7

Truma Ultraheat 6

Vehicle jack (AL-KO) 5

Wall pocket 1

Alde hot-water heater/boiler 30

Hot water supply with boiler 15

Water tank, mobile, 22 litres, with external flap 3

Truma winter package 6

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

199Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Technical data 16

16Technical data16.1 Table of linear measures

16.2 Power supply

Ty pe

B od

y le

ng th

, e xt

er io

r

B od

y le

ng th

, i nt

er io

r

B od

y w

id th

, e xt

er io

r

To ta

l l en

gt h

O ve

ra ll

he ig

ht

A w

ni ng

d im

en si

on s

460 TL 5790 5200 2300 7120 2540 9770

465 TS 5890 5300 2300 7200 2540 9870

490 TS 6090 5500 2300 7410 2540 10070

510 TS 5890 5300 2500 7260 2540 9870

535 TL 6170 5580 2300 7550 2540 10150

535 TS 6640 6050 2300 8040 2540 10620

540 TL 6170 5580 2500 7580 2540 10150

540 TS 6640 6050 2500 8010 2540 10620

560 TK 6360 5780 2500 7780 2540 10340

680 TK 7790 7200 2500 9190 2540 11770

700 TK 7910 7320 2500 9310 2540 11890

800 TK 8150 7560 2500 9550 2540 12130

Input voltage Primary 230 V AC, 47-63 Hz

Output voltage Secondary 12 V DC, max. 32 A

Fuse Protection class I

200 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Technical data16

201Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes 17

17Helpful notesChapter overview This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey. The instructions address the following topics:

road assistance in European countries traffic rules in European countries gas supply in European countries toll regulations in European countries safe ways to spend the night during travel camping in winter

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important equipment for the journey.

17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries

Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following rules when travelling abroad:

Take the green insurance card with you. Always register accidents with the police. Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.

17.2 Help on Europe's roads

The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your automobile club or embassy for further information. In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents.

Country Emergen- cy services

Police

Breakdown service

Belgium 112 112

TCB Brussels 0 70 34 47 77

Bulgaria 150 166

UAB (02) 9 11 46/146 1)

Denmark 112 free of charge

112 free of charge

FDM 45 27 07 07

Germany 112 110

ADAC 22 22 22 1)

Estonia 112

110/112 1) EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88 1)

Finland 112 112

Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00

France 15/112 1)

17/112 1)

Lyon (08) 25 80 08 22

202 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes17

Greece 112

171/112 1)

ELPA 104 00

Great Britain 112 112

AA (08 00) 0 28 90 18

Ireland 999/112 1)

999/112 1)

AA Dublin 18 00 66 77 88

Iceland 112 112

F.I.B 5 11 21 12

Italy 118/112 1)

112

ACI 8 00 11 68 00

Croatia 112 112

HAK 9 87/ 0 19 87 1)

Latvia 03/112 1)

02/112 1)

LAMB 18 88

Lithuania 03/112 1)

02/112 1)

LAS 8 80 00 00 00/18 88 1)

Luxembourg 112

113/112 1)

ACL 2 60 00

Macedonia 194 192

AMSM +389 2 31 81 196

Montenegro 94 92

AMSCG 19807

Netherlands 112 112

ANWB (088) 2 69 28 88

Norway 113 112

NAF 0 85 05

Austria 144/112 1)

133/112 1)

AMTC 120

Poland 999/112 1)

997/112 1)

PZM 022 5 32 84 33

Portugal 112 112

ACP Lissab. (21) 9 42 91 03 ACP Porto (22) 8 34 00 01

Romania 961/112 1)

955/112 1)

ACR (021) 2 22 22 22

Russia 03 02

RAS 8- (4 95) 7 47 66 66

Sweden 112 112

(08) 6 90 38 00

Switzerland 144

117/112 1) TCS 1 40/03 18 50 53 11 1)

Country Emergen- cy services

Police

Breakdown service

203Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes 17

Date 07/2010 Specifications without guarantee

17.3 Speed limits

For information, the speed limits of the countries visited most (all specifications in km/h):

Serbia 94 92

AMSS 987

Slovakia 112 112

SATC 1 81 24

Slovenia 112 113

AMZS (1) 9 87/ 00386 1 5 30 53 53 1)

Spain 061/112 1)

112

RACE 9 15 93 33 33

Czech Republic 112 112

UAMK CR 12 30

Turkey 112

155/112 1)

TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40

Ukraine 03 02

112 UA (8-032) 2 97 65 50

Hungary 104/112 1)

107/112 1)

MAK 1 88/(06) 13 45 17 44 1)

Cyprus 112 112

AA (022) 31 31 31

1) In the mobile communication network

Country Emergen- cy services

Police

Breakdown service

Please always observe the speed limits in the individual countries. The caravan constructions were designed for a maximum permissible speed of 100 km/h (60 mph). Therefore never drive faster than 100 km/h (60 mph).

Country In built-up areas

Outside built-up areas

Motorway

Belgium 50 90/120 1) 2) 120 2)

Bulgaria 50 70 100

Denmark 50 70 80

Germany 50 80 80/100 3) 4)

Estonia 50 70 70

Finland 50 80 80

France 50 90 5)/110 1) 2) 6) 130 7) 2)

Greece 50 80 80

204 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes17

Great Britain 48 80/96 1) 96 3)

Ireland 50 80 80

Iceland 50 80

Italy 50 70 80

Croatia 50 80 80

Latvia 50 80 80

Lithuania 50 70 70

Luxembourg 50 75 90

Macedonia 40/60 80 80

Montenegro 50 80 80

Netherlands 50 80 80

Norway 50 60 8)/80 60 8)/80

Austria 50 100 9) 100 9)

Poland 50 70/80 1) 80

Portugal 50 70/80 10) 100

Romania 50 70/80 1) 90

Russia 60 70 90 11)

Sweden 50 80 12) 80 12)

Switzerland 50 80 80

Serbia 50 80 80

Slovakia 50 90 90

Slovenia 50 80 80

Spain 50 70/80 1) 80

Czech Republic 50 80 80

Turkey 40 70 80

Ukraine 60 80 11) 80 11)

Hungary 50 70 80

Cyprus 50 80 100

1) On expressways, on roads with more than one lane in each direction and on roads resembling highways

2) In the event of accidents involving speeds in excess of 100 km/h insurance pay- ments may be reduced as caravans are only type approved for speeds up to 100 km/h

3) Towing vehicle/trailer combinations must not use the far left-hand lane (far right- hand lane in GB) on three-lane motorways

4) Only with the approval of the road traffic authority for the relevant towing vehicle/ trailer combination.

5) In wet conditions 80 km/h 6) In wet conditions 100 km/h 7) In wet conditions 110 km/h

Country In built-up areas

Outside built-up areas

Motorway

205Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes 17

Date 07/2010 Source: ADAC Specifications without guarantee

17.4 Driving with low beam in European countries

17.5 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas

8) Trailers with no brakes and a current gross weight exceeding 300 kg 9) With trailer of over 750 kg (max. perm. gross weight of 3.5 t), the following applies:

On highways 80 km/h, on motorways 100 km/h. For towing vehicles over 3.5 t perm. gross weight, 70 km/h out of town, 80 km/h on motorways

10) According to the traffic signs 11) Drivers who have had their driver's licence for less than two years must not drive

faster than 70 km/h 12) Trailer with no brakes whose maximum permissible gross weight is two times the

unladen weight of the towing vehicle: 40 km/h

In many European countries, it is compulsory to drive with the vehicle's lights on even during the day. Regulations vary between countries. Motoring organisations or consulates can provide you with the relevant information.

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

Belgium X X On highway rest areas max. 24 hours permitted

Bulgaria X X

Denmark X X On streets and squares only up to 11 hours with a parking disc

Germany X X Staying overnight for one night to restore driving ability is per- mitted. There may be regional and local limitations

Finland X X Possible with the permission of the land owner

France X X Permission from the local au- thorities or the owner of the land is required. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro- hibited

Greece X X Staying overnight for one night at designated areas on the na- tional route Patras-Athens- Thessaloniki is permitted

Great Britain X X

Ireland X X

206 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes17

Italy X X Staying overnight for one night at car parks and service stations is allowed. Observe the local regulations. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro- hibited

Croatia X X

Luxembourg X X

Macedonia X X

Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and squares is allowed in some bor- oughs

Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are- as and cultivated grounds. Trav- elling on dirt roads is prohibited

Austria X X Staying overnight for one night to restore driving ability is per- mitted, but not in nature re- serves. Observe regional and local restrictions. Generally for- bidden in Tyrol

Poland X X Requires property owner's per- mission

Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night on motorway service stations and car parks under 10 hours are tolerated

Romania X X

Russia X X

Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in the vicinity of houses. Driving on open fields is prohibited

Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway rest areas and in some cantons is tolerated

Serbia and Montenegro

X X

Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present

Slovenia X X

Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap- ply, especially on beaches

Czech Repub- lic

X X Overnight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

207Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes 17

Specifications without guarantee

17.6 Gas supply in European countries

General tips Always observe the following instructions:

Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles. Use all of the gas bottles' capacity. Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator to foreign gas bottles. During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component (butane does not gas below 0 C). Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only use gas bottles with safety valves. When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart- ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.

17.7 Toll regulations in European countries Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country. Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe. As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.

Turkey X X

Ukraine X X

Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately owned land is permitted only with police certification

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign country. Get information about the connection system in the country you are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club or in the trade press.

208 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes17

17.8 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe night in the caravan. The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules are observed:

Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and skylights. During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking areas located along typical vacation routes. Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the parking site. Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site. Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate vicinity of windows or doors. Always lock up the vehicle.

17.9 Tips for winter campers The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable as possible.

Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are often booked up early. Do not start your trip without winter tyres. Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you. Snow and ice may melt. Place boards of a sufficient size under the jockey wheel and the corner steadies to prevent then from sinking when the snow thaws. When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent freezing. Protect the handbrake lever and the accumulator against frost with protec- tive covers. No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation. Protect the gas bottle compartment against freezing with a protective cover. Do not leave waste water in the tank but drain it into a bucket. Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice. Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents mois- ture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area. Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries". Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so that the supply does not run out during the night. Only operate the gas system using propane gas. Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment. Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning. Lay the 230 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal). Use a winter awning. When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly. A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow quickly becomes a heavy burden. Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".

209Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes 17

17.10 Travel checklists The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.

Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information) as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before com- mencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will save unnecessary trouble.

Object Object Object

Kitchen area Wiping cloth Cleansing agent (detergent)

Salad servers

Mug Dishcloths Chopping board

Turnspit Set of knifes and forks for grilling

Bowls

Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the dishes

Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the dishes

Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches

Lighter Spoons Cups

Bottle opener Knifes Plates

Air-tight storage boxes

Garbage bags Thermos jug

Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots

Forks Stirring spoons Glasses

Bathroom/sanitary items

Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass

Sanitary items Toilet paper

Living area Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes

Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit

Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park- ing guide

Bath shoes Broom Rucksack

Batteries Candles Sleeping bags

Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper

Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes

Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish

Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner

Camping guide Map Flash light

Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife

Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth

Binoculars Neck-supporting pillow

Clothes pins

210 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Helpful notes17

Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline

Gas bottle Radio

Vehicle/tools Waste water con- tainer

Fabric tape Screwdriver

Adapter socket Watering can for drinking water

Current-measuring instrument

CEE adapter Cable reel Step

Wire V-belt Wheel chocks

Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit

Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack

Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri- angle

Replacement wa- ter pump

Luster terminals Warning sign

Hammer Loops Warning vest

Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard warning light

Gas filling adapter Hose clips

Gas tube Snow chains (win- ter)

Outside Stay rope Camping table Lock

Bellows Luggage racks String

Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten- ing ropes

Documents List of addresses Registration book Identity card

Registration confir- mation(s)

Driving licence Passport

Allergy certificate Green insurance card

Writ of protection

Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi- cate

Vignette/toll card

Instruction leaflets for medicines

Credit card Visa

Object Object Object

211Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Inspection plan 18

18Inspection plan

Pos. Component Activity Interval

1 Jockey wheel Lubricate, check wheel rims for damage, visu- al check of the tyres, check threaded spin- dle and crank

Annually

2 Corner steadies Lubrication Annually

3 Joints, hinges and levers on the chassis

Lubrication Annually

4 Underbody Visual check, repair underbody protection as necessary

Annually

5 Chassis Lubrication Annually

6 Wheel attachment Tighten the wheel nuts, check tyre bear- ings

Annually

7 Tyres and wheel rims Air pressure check (see section 13.7). Visual check for dam- age, tread depth at least 2 mm

Annually

8 Brakes Check and adjust if necessary

Annually

9 Outside lighting Function check Annually

10 Refrigerator, heater, kitchenette, storage flap locks, water system, interior electrics

Function check Annually

11 Upholstery, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually

12 Windows, skylights Function check, water ingress test

Annually

13 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually

14 Brake lining Lining thickness min. 4 mm

Every two years

15 Brake drums Visual check for wear and rust, check spring tension

Every two years

16 Axle bearing Check the slack Every two years

17 Slotted nut on the wheel Check position and dummy fuse

Every two years

18 Overrun brake Function check Every two years

19 Brake cable assembly Visual check Every two years

20 Chassis underbody Check bolts are firmly secured

Every two years

21 Gas fittings Official gas inspection Every two years

212 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Inspection plan18

Delivery Pos. 1-13

Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature

1st year Pos. 1-13 2nd year Pos. 1-21

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

3rd year Pos. 1-13 4th year Pos. 1-21

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

5th year Pos. 1-13 6th year Pos. 1-21

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

7th year Pos. 1-13 8th year Pos. 1-21

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

213Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Index

12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 For the refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 For Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92 On the power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91

12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 89 External flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

230 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 230 V fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 230 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 230 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

A Accessories, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Adapter, thirteen-pin plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Add-on parts see special equipment . . . . . . . . . 12 Adjustable head section, fixed bed . . . . . . . . . . 64 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

Air current, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Air conditioning unit (Telair) Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Filter, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Ventilation grill, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Air outlet nozzles, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Airmix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Semi-automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Antenna, lowering for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Warranty cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

ATC (caravan control system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Automatic power selection (AES) . . . . . . . . . . 123 Awning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

B Basic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Battery main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Battery see living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Bed widening, single beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Bike rack

Bicycles, loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 On the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 On the rear wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Travelling with a loaded bike rack . . . . . . . . 30

Blind, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Blind, Heki skylight

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Blind, window Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Boiler (Alde) Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 230 V electrical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Combined operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Gas operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 183 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Braking system, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Breakaway brake cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Breakdown services in Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Index

214 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164, 166 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Front lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Halogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Recessed halogen light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Types of external bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Butane gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 72

C Cable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Camping gas bottles, use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 72 Camping in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Cap for the drinking water filler neck . . . . . . . . . 48 Capacity of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Caravan

Correct loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Pitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Caravan control system (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Caravan control system (IDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Caravan coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 19 WS 3000 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 WS 3000 D, maintenance work . . . . . . . . . 161

Caravan load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 29 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Furniture surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 High-pressure cleaner, washing with . . . . . 147 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 In the winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Net curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Synthetic parts, interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Carpet, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Ceiling lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174, 177 With alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Chassis, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 154

Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 For the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Initial start-up after temporary lay-up . . . . .156 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Children's beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Circuit diagram

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Cleaning

Water pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Cleaning see care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

On the double acrylic glass pane . . . . . . . . .53 On the screwed connections in the floor . . . .52

Condensation water see condensation . . . . . . . .53 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Connecting cable see 230 V power supply . . . . .89 Connection diagram, thirteen-pin plug . . . . . . . .93 Connection to the towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 44

Roman shade, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Roman shade, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Conversion door, inside Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

215Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Index

Conversion door, outside Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Corner steadies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Cranking down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Cranking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

D Danger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 52 Detaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Dimensions see table of linear measures . . . . 199 Displays, battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Disposal

Household waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Sewage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Waste water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Doors

Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driving in reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Driving with the caravan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 DuoControl switching facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

E Electric kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Panel LT 408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 230 V connection, troubleshooting . . . . . . 186 Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Lighting, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Environmental tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Exterior lighting

Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Types of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 External connection see 230 V connection . . . . 39

External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Flap lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46, 47

External gas connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 External mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 31 External socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Filter, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

F Fault current protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Fire

Behaviour in the event of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Extinguishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fire risks, avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FI-switch see fault current protection switch . . . 92 Fixed bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64 Head section, lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Head section, raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64

Flap lock Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47, 48 Elliptical-shaped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Flap for toilet cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47, 48 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Flat screen with holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 52 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Floor warming unit, electrical Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Forced ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 52 Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49

Furniture flaps, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Furniture surfaces, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Fuses

12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 230 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 For the Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92 On the power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91

Fuses see 12 V fuses and 230 V fuse . . . . . . . . 90

Index

216 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

G Gas alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Gas bottle compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15, 72 Gas bottles

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 72

Gas connection, external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Gas cooker

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 97

Gas odour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 71, 187 Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Gas supply in European countries . . . . . . . . . . 207 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 71, 187 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 71 Switching automatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Gas tube, check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 72 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

H Halogen spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Hand crank, corner steadies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 37 Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Heat exchanger, heater, replacement . . . . . . . . 97 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Air outlet nozzles, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Battery on the automatic ignition, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Heat exchanger, replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Initial start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Heater automatic ignition, changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Heating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Heki skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60

Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 61 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Ventilation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60, 61

Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 High rate of gas consumption . . . . . . . 14, 71, 187 High-pressure cleaner, washing with . . . . . . . .147 Hinged window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55 Continuous ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 56 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 55 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Hot galvanized chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Hot water source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

Hot-air heater Battery on the automatic ignition, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Hot-water heater 230 V electrical operation, selecting . . . . . .103 Adjustment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 Fluid level, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Gas and 230 V electrical operation, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Gas operation, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Heater, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Heater, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 Heating fluid, topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Heating system, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

217Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Index

Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Start screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Tool menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

I IDC (caravan control system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Indicator lamp, 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . 85 Indicator lamp, 230 V power supply . . . . . . . . . 84 Indicator lamp, water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Information stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Inner door, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Inner doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Insect screen door

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Insect screen, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Insect screen, Heki skylight

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61

Insect screen, windows Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 58

Inspection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Thirteen pin socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Interior lighting

Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

L Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Lay-up

Temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Leakage water inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 194 Leather covers, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Lift-off table

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Table-top, moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Light metal wheel rims see alloy wheel rims . . 177 Light switch

Entrance area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Living area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Lighting Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Load see also payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Lock

Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 External flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47 Furniture flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

M Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 152 Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 AKS 1300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 AKS 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Manoeuvring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 WS 3000 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Manoeuvring system Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Marker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Mass in ready-to-drive condition . . . . . . . . . 25, 27 Maximum permissible gross weight . . . . . . . 25, 27 Maximum permissible speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Maximum speed, technically permissible . . . . . 203

Index

218 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Microwave oven Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Minimum nose weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Mover see manoeuvring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

N Net curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 No gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Nose weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25, 29

O Operating modes

Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 107 Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 121, 123 Switching automatics, gas system . . . . . . . . 76

Oven see gas cooker or gas oven . . . . . . 115, 116 Overrun brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

P Panel LT 408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Panel see also displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 25

Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Example calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27

Payload see also load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 People in the caravan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 35 Permissible gross weight see maximum permissible gross weight . . . . . . 25 Permitted mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Personal equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Power supply unit CSV 400-1

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Power supply unit CSV 409 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Propane gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 72 PVC-floor covering, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

R Rear axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Recessed halogen light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 119

12 V operation, switching on/off . . . . .121, 123 230 V operation, switching on/off . . . .121, 123 Change-over between energy sources . . . .124 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Gas operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Gas operation, switching off . . . . . . . .121, 122 Gas operation, switching on . . . . . . . .120, 122 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 121, 123 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Refrigerating temperature control . . . . . . . .125 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Ventilation grill, removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Refrigerator door locking mechanism Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Locking in the ventilation position . . . . . . . .126 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal . . . . . . . .119 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Risk of frost damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 127, 131 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Notes for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Roman shade, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Roman shade, Heki skylight

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Roman shade, window of conversion door Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Roman shade, windows Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Round seating group, sleeping conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68, 69

S Safety cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

219Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Index

Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 71 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Safety switch (FI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 SAT socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Satellite unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41

With automatic antenna alignment . . . . 39, 41 With semi-automatic antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Seating groups, sleeping conversion . . . . . . . . 66 Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Side marker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Single beds, bed widening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sink, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Sleeping conversion

Bench and central seating group . . . . . . . . 66 Round seating group . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68, 69 Widening single beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Sockets External socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 SAT socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 TV socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 178 Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177, 178 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Weight details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 168

Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Stabiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

AKS 1300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 AKS 1300, maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . 160 AKS 3004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 AKS 3004, maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . 160 WS 3000 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 WS 3000 D, maintenance work . . . . . . . . . 161

Stabiliser see also caravan coupling . . . . . 19, 159 Stabilising lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Start-up After temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 After winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Staying overnight Away from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 During travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Supports see corner steadies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Suspension table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Switching automatics, gas system . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Symbols

For instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 97

Synthetic parts in the toilet and living areas, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

T Table of linear measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Technical data

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Thetford cassette . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 137, 140, 143

Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 143 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Retaining clip . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 137, 140, 143

Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 143 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 140 Swiveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 142 Water tank, emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Water tank, filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 With fixed seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Thirteen-pin plug, connection diagram . . . . . . . . 93 Tightening torque, wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 177 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Toilet see also Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Toll regulations in European countries . . . . . . . 207 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Index

220 Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Travel cots suitable for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 193 Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Boiler (Alde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Caravan control system (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . 184 Caravan control system (IDC) . . . . . . . . . . 185 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Hot water source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Inner door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Manoeuvring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

TV socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Tyre change see changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . 173 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Excessive wear . . . . . . . . . . .13, 32, 171, 178 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Load-carrying capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Tyre selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

U Ultraheat additional electric heater . . . . . . . . . . 104

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Underbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

V Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Vehicle jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7, 177 Vehicle lighting see exterior lighting . . . . . . . . .164 Vehicle, washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

W Warning stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Warranty cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . .147 Waste gas vent on the right hand side of the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 110 Waste gas vent, cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39, 130

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Water pipes, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 130

Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Water supply General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Water system Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Disinfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 129 Water, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Water tank 22 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Water tank 40 l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Weight details for special equipment . . . . . . . .197 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Wheel rim size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Wheel rim type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

221Belcanto/Trecento - 11/12 - Ausgabe 09/11 - 2096154 - BUE-0042-07EN

Index

Window, conversion door Roman shade, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Roman shade, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Windows, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Winter operat

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Trecento Burstner works, you can view and download the Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Instruction Manual for Burstner Trecento as well as other Burstner manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Instruction Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Burstner Trecento. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Burstner Trecento 2012 Instruction Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.